Gluten Free Recipes recipe ideas with great flavours - ProperFoodie https://properfoodie.com/gluten-free-recipes/ Nutritious and full flavoured recipes Sat, 17 Sep 2022 19:05:44 +0000 en-US hourly 1 https://wordpress.org/?v=6.4.4 https://properfoodie.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/square-logo-96x96.png Gluten Free Recipes recipe ideas with great flavours - ProperFoodie https://properfoodie.com/gluten-free-recipes/ 32 32 Mango Salsa Recipe https://properfoodie.com/mango-avocado-salad/ https://properfoodie.com/mango-avocado-salad/#respond Sat, 17 Sep 2022 19:05:42 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=9031 A refreshing mango salsa recipe, great served on its own or loaded on tortilla chips. Made with chunks of avocado, fiery red chilli and a good handful of fresh coriander. A perfect Caribbean starter or side dish and especially great with anything spicy.  👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe Mango salsa is a great recipe for...

Read More

The post Mango Salsa Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
A refreshing mango salsa recipe, great served on its own or loaded on tortilla chips. Made with chunks of avocado, fiery red chilli and a good handful of fresh coriander. A perfect Caribbean starter or side dish and especially great with anything spicy. 

Bowl of mango salsa with some being scooped out on a tortilla crisp.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

Mango salsa is a great recipe for a healthy starter or refreshing side dish. Its easy to prepare and perfect for a make ahead appetiser. Best served cold; toss in lime juice to keep the salsa at its freshest and then chill in the fridge.

🥘 Ingredients

This recipe makes enough mango salsa to serve 6 people:

Ingredients for making mango salsa.

Ingredient notes

Measurements: For the amounts required, see the recipe card below and also use the toggle button to see the recipe in cups.

Limes: Lime juice is essential in the recipe for keeping everything fresh and vibrant. The acidic lime prevents oxidation and browning of the chopped avocado. If you can't get hold of limes you can also use lemon juice.

Avocados and mangos: Use ripe avocados and mangos that feel soft but not squishy.

Chilli: Optional.

Coriander (cilantro): Also optional and could be replaced with freshly chopped parsley.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Finely dice the red onion and mix in a large bowl with the juice of one lime.
  2. Add finely chopped chilli and diced mango and avocado to the red onion. Add the juice of a second lime and toss everything together well.
  3. Season with salt and pepper (to taste).
  4. Garnish with freshly chopped coriander (cilantro).
How to make mango salsa step by step

💭 Expert tips

  • At the start of the mango salsa recipe add juice of one lime to the chopped red onion and leave to soak for a minute or two. This will help to take the harsh bite out of the raw onion flavour.
  • Add the rest of the lime juice to the chopped avocado and mango to help keep it fresh and to stop the browning process.
  • Sprinkle the coriander over the top as a garnish or for a more even finish and taste stir well into the finished salsa dish.
  • Mango and avocado salsa is a dish I like to make in advance as the mango and avocado chopping can be a bit messy. However, if you don't mind a bit salad prep just before dinner or even once your guests have arrived then this is quite an easy recipe to knock together from scratch. For more salad ideas why not try my Vietnamese style beef salad, Italian pasta salad, roasted cauliflower salad.

❓ Frequently asked questions

Can you make this recipe ahead of time?

Yes, this easy mango salsa recipe can be made up to one day ahead of time. Make sure to mix in plenty of lime juice to keep all the ingredients fresh, then store in the fridge until ready to serve.

Is this recipe healthy?

This recipe is bursting at the seams with nutrients; from the monounsaturated fats in the avocado to all the fibre and vitamins in the mango, lime and chilli. - Its really not just a pretty dish.

Bowl of mango and avocado salsa.

🥗 Other starter recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Bowl of mango salsa with some being scooped out on a tortilla crisp.
Print

Mango Salsa Recipe

A refreshing mango salsa recipe, great served on its own or loaded on tortilla chips. Made with chunks of avocado, fiery red chilli and a good handful of fresh coriander. A perfect Caribbean starter or side dish and especially great with anything spicy. 
Course Appetizer, lunch, Salad, Side Dish, starter
Cuisine cuban, Mexican
Diet Gluten Free, Low Calorie, Low Fat, Low Lactose, Vegan, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 0 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 6 people
Calories 43kcal

Equipment

  • Sharp knife
  • chopping board
  • Large mixing bowl
  • Large spoon
  • Serving bowl and spoon

Ingredients

  • 1 red onion finely chopped
  • 2 limes juiced
  • 1 chilli deseeded and finely chopped
  • 2 mangoes peeled and chopped
  • 1 avocado peeled and chopped
  • Salt and pepper to taste
  • Handful of fresh coriander (cilantro) roughly chopped

Instructions

  • Finely dice the red onion and mix in a large bowl with the juice of one lime.
    1 red onion, 2 limes
  • Add finely chopped chilli and diced mango and avocado to the red onion. Add the juice of a second lime and toss everything together well.
    2 mangoes, 1 avocado, 1 chilli, 2 limes
  • Season with salt and pepper (to taste).
    Salt and pepper
  • Garnish with freshly chopped coriander.
    Handful of fresh coriander (cilantro)

Notes

Limes: Lime juice is essential in the recipe for keeping everything fresh and vibrant. The acidic lime prevents oxidation and browning of the chopped avocado. If you can't get hold of limes you can also use lemon juice.
Avocados and mangos: Use ripe avocados and mangos that feel soft but not squishy.
Chilli: Optional.
Coriander (cilantro): Also optional and could be replaced with freshly chopped parsley.
Can you make this recipe ahead of time? Yes, this easy mango salsa recipe can be made up to one day ahead of time. Make sure to mix in plenty of lime juice to keep all the ingredients fresh, then store in the fridge until ready to serve.
Is this recipe healthy? This recipe is bursting at the seams with nutrients; from the monounsaturated fats in the avocado to all the fibre and vitamins in the mango, lime and chilli. - Its really not just a pretty dish.
Expert tips:
  • At the start of the mango salsa recipe add juice of one lime to the chopped red onion and leave to soak for a minute or two. This will help to take the harsh bite out of the raw onion flavour.
  • Add the rest of the lime juice to the chopped avocado and mango to help keep it fresh and to stop the browning process.
  • Sprinkle the coriander over the top as a garnish or for a more even finish and taste stir well into the finished salsa dish.

Nutrition

Serving: 75g | Calories: 43kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 0.2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 9mg | Potassium: 140mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 438IU | Vitamin C: 19mg | Calcium: 10mg | Iron: 0.2mg

This post was first published in Nov 2016. Updated in Sept 2022 with an improved recipe, new images, step by step instructions and expert tips. 

The post Mango Salsa Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/mango-avocado-salad/feed/ 0
Sweet Potato and Chickpea Curry https://properfoodie.com/sweet-potato-spinach-curry/ https://properfoodie.com/sweet-potato-spinach-curry/#comments Tue, 15 Mar 2022 22:56:53 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=2275 Warm and comforting sweet potato and chickpea curry made with a lightly spiced coconut sauce. This wholesome and nutritious vegetarian curry is made in one big pan and can be ready in just one hour. 👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe This warming sweet potato and chickpea curry is a great option for a delicious vegetarian...

Read More

The post Sweet Potato and Chickpea Curry appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Warm and comforting sweet potato and chickpea curry made with a lightly spiced coconut sauce. This wholesome and nutritious vegetarian curry is made in one big pan and can be ready in just one hour.

Sweet potato and chickpea curry in a bowl with naan bread and topped with yogurt and coriander.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Please note that this post contains affiliate links, which means if you click the link and then go on to purchase, I will receive a percentage of the cost. See my privacy policy and disclosure statement for further details.

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

This warming sweet potato and chickpea curry is a great option for a delicious vegetarian dinner with plenty of healthy veg and aromatic spicy flavours. The sweet potatoes really bring this dish to life by melting their wonderfully sweet caramelised juices into the spicy coconut sauce and creating a gorgeous consistency. A warm and inviting curry with husky flavours of cumin and garam masala and a pungent taste of ginger all infused with the sweetness of the potatoes. It really is the ultimate healthy, comfort food.

🥘 Ingredients

This recipe makes enough sweet potato curry to serve 4 people:

Ingredients needed to make sweet potato and chickpea curry

Ingredient notes

Measurements: For the amounts required, see the recipe card below and also use the toggle button to see the recipe in cups.

Sweet potatoes: If preferred you can use normal potatoes, and make potato and spinach curry.

Coconut milk: Use full fat coconut as reduced fat will make the curry watery.

Chickpeas: Optional or can be replaced with other pulses such as beans, split peas or lentils.

Yogurt (not pictured): Yogurt is an optional topping, but its creamy and cooling nature works really well with the heat from the spices. Choose plain yogurt.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Heat up the oil in a large frying pan, add the cumin seeds and fry for 30 seconds or until golden brown (be careful not to burn them). As soon as the seeds start to change colour add in the chopped onion, garlic and ginger and cook on a gentle heat until soft.
  2. Stir in the curry powder, garam masala and cinnamon and cook for a further minute to allow the flavours to be released.
  3. Next add the cubed sweet potato, chopped tomatoes, tomato puree and coconut milk. Stir together well then bring to a gentle simmer.
  4. Place a lid on the pan and continue to simmer for around 30 minutes or until the potatoes are soft (blade of a knife pushes in easily).Collage of 4 images showing step by step how to make sweet potato curry for steps 1-4.
  5. Meanwhile drain and rinse the can of chickpeas and wash the spinach leaves. Once the potatoes are cooked through, add the chickpeas and spinach to the curry. Stir in and continue to cook on the heat until the spinach has wilted. 
  6. Season with salt, pepper and lime juice then serve with rice and naan. Add toppings if desired: yogurt, fresh coriander, chilli flakes, onion seeds and lime wedges.Collage of 2 images showing how to make sweet potato curry for steps 5 and 6.

💭 Expert tips

  • Frying cumin seeds: Add a couple of cumin seeds to test the heat of the oil. If the seeds bubble then the oil is hot enough. Add the rest of the seeds but only cook briefly, until just golden brown, before adding the onions. Be aware that cumin seeds are quick to burn, which will create a bitter taste throughout the dish.
  • Chickpeas: To avoid any chickpeas skins floating around in the curry, place the chickpeas in a sieve then agitate under a running tap to loosen any skins. Pick these out and discard.
  • Make it your own: Use split peas, lentils or beans, or completely swap the chickpeas for one of these. Try with different types of lentils (green, yellow) or add other vegetables such as roasted squash, roast cauliflower, courgette or aubergine. And for an extra protein boost try with shredded chicken or poached fish.

❓ Frequently asked questions

Is sweet potato and chickpea curry healthy?

This curry is packed full of nutrients including protein, fibre, iron and plenty of vitamins and minerals. Chickpeas are low in fat and high in protein and along with the sweet potatoes will do a great. Job of filling you up due to both containing plenty of fibre. Spinach is also a great option for boosting your iron and folate levels.

How to make this curry extra spicy?

If you like your curry hot then there are a couple of extras you can add to turn up the heat. Try adding fresh green or red chopped chillies during cooking. The increase the heat further use smaller chillies and leave in the seeds. You could also add chilli flakes whiles cooking or add chilli sauce or Tabasco as toppings.

How to store?

What to do with any leftovers? Once fully cooled you can transfer any leftover curry to a sealable container. Seal and keep in the fridge for 2-3 days or freeze for up to 1 month. To reheat defrost thoroughly in the fridge overnight (if frozen) then transfer to a pan and heat until piping hot throughout.

Sweet Potato and chick curry in a bowl with a piece of naan bread and extra naan and lime in the background.

🍛 Other Curry recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Sweet potato and chickpea curry in a bowl with naan bread and topped with yogurt and coriander.
Print

Sweet Potato and Chickpea Curry

Warm and comforting sweet potato and chickpea curry made with a lightly spiced coconut sauce. This wholesome and nutritious vegetarian curry is made in one big pan and can be ready in just one hour.
Course Dinner, evening meal, fake away, main meal
Cuisine Indian
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 25 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 55 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 238kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon cumin seeds
  • 1 onion roughly chopped
  • 1 clove garlic finely chopped
  • 2 cm piece fresh ginger peeled and grated
  • 2 tablespoons medium curry powder
  • 1 teaspoon garam masala
  • 1 teaspoon cinnamon powder
  • 2 large sweet potatoes peeled and chopped into small chunks
  • 2 tins of chopped tomatoes
  • 2 tablespoons tomato puree
  • 1 tin coconut milk full fat
  • 2 handfuls of baby spinach leaves
  • 1 small tin chickpeas
  • Lime juice to taste
  • Salt and pepper to taste

Extras to serve

  • Rice
  • Plain yogurt
  • Chilli flakes
  • Onion seeds
  • Fresh coriander
  • Naan bread

Instructions

  • Heat up the oil in a large frying pan, add the cumin seeds and fry for 30 seconds or until golden brown (be careful not to burn them). As soon as the seeds start to change colour add in the chopped onion, garlic and ginger and cook on a gentle heat until soft.
    1 tablespoon olive oil, 1 teaspoon cumin seeds, 1 onion, 1 clove garlic, 2 cm piece fresh ginger
  • Stir in the curry powder, garam masala and cinnamon and cook for a further minute to allow the flavours to be released.
    2 tablespoons medium curry powder, 1 teaspoon garam masala, 1 teaspoon cinnamon powder
  • Next add the cubed sweet potato, chopped tomatoes, tomato puree and coconut milk. Stir together well then bring to a gentle simmer.
    2 large sweet potatoes, 2 tins of chopped tomatoes, 2 tablespoons tomato puree, 1 tin coconut milk
  • Place a lid on the pan and continue to simmer for around 30 minutes or until the potatoes are soft (blade of a knife pushes in easily).
  • Meanwhile drain and rinse the can of chickpeas and wash the spinach leaves. Once the potatoes are cooked through, add the chickpeas and spinach to the curry. Stir in and continue to cook on the heat until the spinach has wilted.
    1 small tin chickpeas, 2 handfuls of baby spinach leaves
  • Season with salt, pepper and lime juice then serve with rice and naan. Add toppings if desired: yogurt, fresh coriander, chilli flakes, onion seeds and lime wedges.
    Lime juice to taste, Rice, Plain yogurt, Chilli flakes, Onion seeds, Fresh coriander, Naan bread

Notes

Note: Above nutritional info is for 1 portion of curry with toppings but without any sides such as rice or naan bread.
Sweet potatoes: If preferred you can use normal potatoes, and make potato and spinach curry.
Coconut milk: Use full fat coconut as reduced fat will make the curry watery.
Chickpeas: Optional or can be replaced with other pulses such as beans, split peas or lentils. To avoid any chickpeas skins floating around in the curry, place the chickpeas in a sieve then agitate under a running tap to loosen any skins. Pick these out and discard.
Yogurt: Yogurt is an optional topping, but its creamy and cooling nature works really well with the heat from the spices. Choose plain yogurt.
Frying cumin seeds: Add a couple of cumin seeds to test the heat of the oil. If the seeds bubble then the oil is hot enough. Add the rest of the seeds but only cook briefly, until just golden brown, before adding the onions. Be aware that cumin seeds are quick to burn, which will create a bitter taste throughout the dish.
Make it your own: Use split peas, lentils or beans, or completely swap the chickpeas for one of these. Try with different types of lentils (green, yellow) or add other vegetables such as roasted squash, roast cauliflower, courgette or aubergine. And for an extra protein boost try with shredded chicken or poached fish.
Is sweet potato and chickpea curry healthy?
This curry is packed full of nutrients including protein, fibre, iron and plenty of vitamins and minerals. Chickpeas are low in fat and high in protein and along with the sweet potatoes will do a great. Job of filling you up due to both containing plenty of fibre. Spinach is also a great option for boosting your iron and folate levels.
How to make this curry extra spicy?
If you like your curry hot then there are a couple of extras you can add to turn up the heat. Try adding fresh green or red chopped chillies during cooking. The increase the heat further use smaller chillies and leave in the seeds. You could also add chilli flakes whiles cooking or add chilli sauce or Tabasco as toppings.
How to store?
What to do with any leftovers? Once fully cooled you can transfer any leftover curry to a sealable container. Seal and keep in the fridge for 2-3 days or freeze for up to 1 month. To reheat defrost thoroughly in the fridge overnight (if frozen) then transfer to a pan and heat until piping hot throughout.

Nutrition

Calories: 238kcal | Carbohydrates: 46g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 5g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Cholesterol: 1mg | Sodium: 282mg | Potassium: 988mg | Fiber: 9g | Sugar: 12g | Vitamin A: 25711IU | Vitamin C: 21mg | Calcium: 140mg | Iron: 4mg

This post was first published in Sept 2016. Updated in Mar 2022 with an improved recipe, new images, step by step instructions and expert tips.

Sweet potato, chickpea & spinach vegetarian curry: a deliciously warming curry with plenty of healthy veg and aromatic spicy flavours | Properfoodie.com

 

The post Sweet Potato and Chickpea Curry appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/sweet-potato-spinach-curry/feed/ 8
Healthy Pancakes Recipe (with Banana and Oats) https://properfoodie.com/healthy-pancakes-recipe/ https://properfoodie.com/healthy-pancakes-recipe/#respond Sat, 06 Feb 2021 18:48:51 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=17031 Healthy pancakes recipe made with bananas & oats for a flourless & milk free pancake alternative. Make the pancake batter in just 5 minutes and enjoy warm and healthy banana pancakes straight from the pan. For more pancake inspiration see: 5 Easy Recipes for Pancakes. [feast_advanced_jump_to] 👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe If you are looking...

Read More

The post Healthy Pancakes Recipe (with Banana and Oats) appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Healthy pancakes recipe made with bananas & oats for a flourless & milk free pancake alternative. Make the pancake batter in just 5 minutes and enjoy warm and healthy banana pancakes straight from the pan. For more pancake inspiration see: 5 Easy Recipes for Pancakes.

A stack of banana pancakes on a plate topped with slices of banana and a line of honey being poured over from honey dipper.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

If you are looking for a flourless and milk free option for Pancake day then this is your recipe. These soft and naturally sweetened, healthy pancakes are packed with banana and oats and are held together with eggs. A lovely nutritious alternative to the usual stodgy pancake. Serve up with extra banana to ensure you are getting in 1 of your 5 day and add a drizzle of honey to make them all the more tempting.

🥘 Ingredients

To make this healthy pancakes recipe at home you will need:

Ingredients needed to make healthy banana pancakes.

Ingredient notes

Measurements: For the amounts required, see the recipe card below and use the toggle button to see the recipe in cups.

Rolled oats: Use rolled oats or porridge oats which will absorb and soften up quicker than whole oats. If you are making gluten free pancakes, double check the label of the oats for gluten.

Bananas: Make sure to use ripe bananas or even bananas with skin that has browned slightly. Under ripe bananas will be less sweet and more difficult to mash.

Baking powder: Baking powder helps the pancakes to rise during cooking so making them light and fluffy. If you are making gluten free pancakes, double check the label on your baking powder and make sure it doesn't contain gluten.

Butter: The butter is purely for use as a cooking agent but you can use oil if you prefer. I suggest melting the butter in the pan, then wiping with a kitchen towel, so spreading the butter and removing any excess. Not using any butter or oil will mean the banana pancakes will burn easily or at the very least will go very dark brown during cooking.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Peel and roughly chop the bananas and place in a large bowl.
  2. Use a fork or masher to mash up the bananas.
  3. Add the eggs, oats, ground almonds and baking powder to the bowl.
  4. Whisk everything together into a batter. The batter will have a more lumpy consistency compared to normal pancake batter, due to the oats and banana. These lumps will soften and blend during cooking.Collage of 4 images showing step by step how to make this recipe for steps 1-4.
  5. Leave the batter to stand for 5 minutes to allow the oats to completely soften.
  6. Heat a frying pan and melt a knob of butter. Wipe the butter around the pan with a kitchen towel, so removing any excess. With the pan on a low-medium heat scoop one heaped tablespoon into the pan and spread into a small circle shape with the back of the spoon. This pancake batter isn't as forgiving as usual batter and will need a little help to spread into a nice shape.
  7. Cook for around 1 minute, keeping the heat low-medium. Gently lift one edge with a spatula to check how its cooking. Be aware that banana pancakes are more delicate than normal pancakes and brown a lot quicker.
  8. Flip the pancake carefully using a spatula when it just starts to turn a golden brown underneath. Cook on the second side for a further 30 seconds or until golden brown. Don't be tempted to try and toss these pancakes!Collage of 4 images showing step by step how to make this recipe for steps 5-8.
  9. Repeat steps 6-8 until all the batter is used. Keep cooked pancakes warm by wrapping in foil. Or eat as you cook and serve with extra sliced banana and a drizzle of honey.

💭 Expert tips

  • During cooking, banana pancakes brown a lot quicker than standard pancakes. To help with this make sure the pan is well buttered or oiled before adding the batter and keep the heat low-medium. Also, use a spatula to carefully check the underside of the pancake regularly before flipping.
  • Handle these pancakes with care when flipping over as they can be quite delicate.
  • For extra flavour and texture mix dried fruit, spices, chocolate chips or spread into the pancake batter.
  • Once the batter is mixed leave to stand for 5 minutes, or a bit longer if you have time, to allow the oats to fully soften.

❓ Frequently asked questions

What toppings to serve with banana pancakes?

The most simple topping for banana pancakes is more banana and a drizzle of honey. However, these healthy pancakes are great on their own. The banana ensures a moisture texture and naturally sweet flavour.

Other toppings you may want to use could include berries, mango, nutella, cream, yogurt, chocolate chips, nuts and seeds.

Can you reheat these pancakes?

In my opinion pancakes are best eaten straight from the pan. However, if you wish, you can make a full batch of pancakes and wrap in foil as you go to keep them warm. If they do need reheating, place the foil wrapped pancakes in a hot oven for 5 minutes or pop each pancake in the toaster until warm.

Are these healthy pancakes gluten free?

These healthy pancakes are gluten free but do contain oats and baking powder. In some instances oats and baking powder can contain gluten. Make sure to use gluten free baking powder and always check the labels of the oats and baking powder. Oats are naturally gluten free but can contain traces of gluten if they are produced in the same place as other gluten containing cereals.

Can these pancakes be frozen?

Once made, allow to fully cool then place in a sealed container and freeze for up to 3 months. Defrost and reheat all in one go in either the microwave or toaster until warmed through.

Stack of banana pancakes topped with sliced bananas, and with a wedge skewered and cut out from one side of the pancake stack and put to the side.

🥞 Other Pancake recipes

🍌 Other Banana recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

A stack of banana pancakes on a plate topped with slices of banana and a line of honey being poured over from above.
Print

Healthy Pancakes Recipe (with Banana and Oats)

Healthy pancakes recipe made with bananas and oats for a flourless and milk free pancake alternative. Make the pancake batter in just 5 minutes and enjoy warm and healthy banana pancakes straight from the pan.
Course afternoon tea, Breakfast, brunch, Dessert
Cuisine British
Diet Gluten Free, Low Fat, Low Lactose
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 8 Pancakes
Calories 71kcal

Equipment

  • Large mixing bowl
  • Fork or masher
  • Whisk
  • Frying pan
  • Large spoon or tablespoon
  • Spatula

Ingredients

  • 2 medium bananas
  • 2 large eggs
  • 1 teaspoon baking powder
  • 1 tablespoon ground almonds
  • 50 g rolled oats or porridge oats
  • knob of Butter for cooking

Instructions

  • Peel and roughly chop the bananas and place in a large bowl.
  • Use a fork or masher to mash up the bananas.
  • Add the eggs, oats, ground almonds and baking powder to the bowl.
  • Whisk everything together into a batter. The batter will have a more lumpy consistency compared to normal pancake batter, due to the oats and banana. These lumps will soften and blend during cooking.
  • Leave the batter to stand for 5 minutes to allow the oats to completely soften.
  • Heat a frying pan and melt a knob of butter. Wipe the butter around the pan with a kitchen towel, so removing any excess. With the pan on a low-medium heat, scoop one heaped tablespoon into the pan and spread into a small circle shape with the back of the spoon. This pancake batter isn't as forgiving as usual batter and will need a little help to spread into a nice shape.
  • Cook for around 1 minute, keeping the heat low-medium. Gently lift one edge with a spatula to check how its cooking. Be aware that banana pancakes are more delicate than normal pancakes and brown a lot quicker.
  • Flip the pancake carefully using a spatula when it just starts to turn a golden brown underneath. Cook on the second side for a further 30 seconds or until golden brown. Don't be tempted to try and toss these pancakes!
  • Repeat steps 6-8 until all the batter is used. Keep cooked pancakes warm by wrapping in foil. Or eat as you cook and serve with extra sliced banana and a drizzle of honey.

Notes

Rolled oats: Use rolled oats or porridge oats which will absorb and soften up quicker than whole oats. If you are making gluten free pancakes, double check the label of the oats for gluten.
Bananas: Make sure to use ripe bananas or even bananas with skin that has browned slightly. Under ripe bananas will be less sweet and more difficult to mash.
Baking powder: Baking powder helps the pancakes to rise during cooking so making them light and fluffy. If you are making gluten free pancakes, double check the label on your baking powder and make sure it doesn't contain gluten.
Butter: The butter is purely for use as a cooking agent but you can use oil if you prefer. I suggest melting the butter in the pan, then wiping with a kitchen towel, so spreading the butter and removing any excess. Not using any butter or oil will mean the banana pancakes will burn easily or at the very least will go very dark brown during cooking.
Toppings: Sliced banana and a drizzle of honey for a simple topping. Other toppings you may want to use could include berries, mango, nutella, cream, yogurt, chocolate chips, nuts and seeds.
Can you reheat these pancakes? In my opinion pancakes are best eaten straight from the pan. However, if you wish, you can make a full batch of pancakes and wrap in foil as you go to keep them warm. If they do need reheating, place the foil wrapped pancakes in a hot oven for 5 minutes or pop each pancake in the toaster until warm.
Are these healthy pancakes gluten free? These healthy pancakes are gluten free but do contain oats and baking powder. In some instances oats and baking powder can contain gluten. Make sure to use gluten free baking powder and always check the labels of the oats and baking powder. Oats are naturally gluten free but can contain traces of gluten if they are produced in the same place as other gluten containing cereals.
Expert tips:
  • During cooking, banana pancakes brown a lot quicker than standard pancakes. To help with this make sure the pan is well buttered or oiled before adding the batter and keep the heat low-medium. Also, use a spatula to carefully check the underside of the pancake regularly before flipping.
  • Handle these pancakes with care when flipping over as they can be quite delicate.
  • For extra flavour and texture mix dried fruit, spices, chocolate chips or spread into the pancake batter.
  • Once the batter is mixed leave to stand for 5 minutes, or a bit longer if you have time, to allow the oats to fully soften.

Nutrition

Calories: 71kcal | Carbohydrates: 11g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 2g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 41mg | Sodium: 69mg | Potassium: 144mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 78IU | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 42mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Healthy Pancakes Recipe (with Banana and Oats) appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/healthy-pancakes-recipe/feed/ 0
Porcini Mushroom Risotto https://properfoodie.com/mushroom-risotto-with-porcini/ https://properfoodie.com/mushroom-risotto-with-porcini/#respond Thu, 24 Feb 2022 20:47:19 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=1423 Porcini mushroom risotto with pearly grains of rice and nutty, plump mushrooms, topped with fresh dill and grated parmesan. Dried porcini mushrooms are used for a greater depth of flavour and the whole dish can be ready in just over 30 minutes. 👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe This easy porcini mushroom risotto recipe is one...

Read More

The post Porcini Mushroom Risotto appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Porcini mushroom risotto with pearly grains of rice and nutty, plump mushrooms, topped with fresh dill and grated parmesan. Dried porcini mushrooms are used for a greater depth of flavour and the whole dish can be ready in just over 30 minutes.

Porcini mushroom risotto on a small plate with fresh dill and parmesan.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Please note that this post contains affiliate links, which means if you click the link and then go on to purchase, I will receive a percentage of the cost. See my privacy policy and disclosure statement for further details.

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

This easy porcini mushroom risotto recipe is one of my most favourite ways to enjoy mushrooms. Even better with a bit of truffle grated on top! Here the dried mushrooms are left to soak in boiling water and the liquid from this is used to make the risotto. Resulting in that wonderfully earthy mushroom flavour being encapsulated in every plump grain of rice. Delicious!

🥘 Ingredients

This recipe makes enough dried porcini mushroom risotto to serve 2 people (or 4 starter-sized portions):

Ingredients for making mushroom risotto.

Ingredient notes

Measurements: For the amounts required, see the recipe card below and also use the toggle button to see the recipe in cups.

Mushrooms: Dried porcini mushrooms are used here. However, you can replace with your preferred type of mushroom (fresh or dried).

Risotto rice: Risotto has short grains and high starch content. Look for as Arborio rice, Carnaroli rice or simply; risotto rice.

Butter: Use butter! Melted butter is used to 'awaken' the rice by coating and softening the uncooked grains so allowing liquids to be easily soaked in. 

Wine: I love the flavour of white wine in risotto and so I add it to all my risotto recipes. But if required it can be replaced with a little apple juice or just left out completely.

Dill: A perfect paring to the earthy mushrooms, but also optional. If preferred leave out or replace with parsley.

Stock: Use good quality stock, both vegetable or a meat based stock will work well.

Parmesan: Any hard Italian cheese will work well.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Soak the dried mushrooms in 500ml of hot water for at least 30 minutes until soft. After 30 minutes remove the mushrooms, reserving the liquid, and roughly chop. Then strain the liquid through a paper towel lined sieve into a clean bowl. 
  2. Melt the butter in a large pan on a medium heat. Add the onions and garlic and fry until soft.
  3. Add the rice and mix in well allowing the melted butter to coat each grain of rice.
  4. Next add the wine and simmer until the wine has nearly all reduced or been absorbed by the rice.Four images showing how to make mushroom risotto for steps 1-4.
  5. Then add two ladles of mushroom liquid, stirring attentively between each ladleful. Only add the second ladle when the first one has been fully absorbed.
  6. At this point switch to the veg stock to ensure the mushroom flavour isn't too overpowering. Add ladlefuls of the veg stock one at a time, again only adding the next ladleful when the previous has absorbed. It will probably take around 15-20 minutes to gradually add the whole lot. By this point the rice should have softened and plumped.
  7. Stir in the soaked mushrooms, soured cream, parmesan and lemon juice.
  8. Serve the porcini mushroom risotto with fresh dill.Four images showing how to make mushroom risotto for steps 5-8.

💭 Expert tips

  • Soaking mushrooms: use a large bowl to soak the dried mushrooms and stir occasionally. The space and stirring will ensure all the mushrooms are fully soaked and plumped up.
  • Mushroom grit: Dried mushrooms can be gritty. To avoid a gritty risotto the mushrooms can be rinsed after they have been soaked. The soaking liquid will also contain grit, so before adding to the risotto this should be strained through a paper towel lined sieve. After straining leave it to settle allowing any leftover grit to sink to the bottom. Do not disturb the bottom when adding the liquid to the risotto.
  • Stock: This recipe uses 2 types of stock. The first is mushroom stock, made by soaking the mushrooms. The second is vegetable stock. The mushroom stock will be very strong as dried mushrooms have a very intense flavour, which can be overpowering. Therefore, I suggest only using 2 ladles of mushroom stock then switch to using vegetable stock. However, feel free to add more mushroom stock for a more intense flavour.
  • Patience: Risotto does require a little patience. Take your time a don't rush the gradual addition of the stock, I promise its well worth it.

❓ Frequently asked questions

Why use dried porcini mushrooms?

Porcini mushrooms are known for their rich, nutty flavour and meaty texture. Fresh porcini mushrooms are hard to come by as whereas dried porcini are widely available year round.

In addition dried mushrooms have a stronger and more intense flavour than fresh. The need to rehydrate the mushrooms in hot water also creates a full flavoured mushroom stock that can be added to the mushroom risotto during cooking.

How to store porcini mushroom risotto?

Risotto is best made fresh. The rice doesn't reheat well and more often than not, reheated risotto will overcook and become sloppy. So do bare this in mind when saving leftovers.

Transfer any leftovers to sealable containers. Make sure the mushroom risotto has fully cooled before sealing and storing in the fridge for up to 2 days. Cooled risotto will set and become hard.

Reheat by returning to the pan with a little hot water and stir until heated through and piping hot. (Please note that proper cooling and reheating is essential for rice dishes).

What is the best rice for risotto?

Risotto has plump, short-medium grains and high starch content. This gives risotto its well known creamy texture when cooked. Look for Arborio, Carnaroli, Vialone nano or just simply; risotto rice.

Arborio rice is the most widely available type of risotto and produces a lovely thick and soft risotto, but can be susceptible to overcooking (becomes sloppy).

Carnaroli isn't as easy to find but is known to be the best due to its higher starch content and resistance to overcooking, which pretty much guarantees a thick and creamy risotto every time.

Vialone nano has smaller, round grains and is considered to be as good as Carnaroli but produces a soupier risotto.

Small plate of mushroom risotto with second plate in the background.

🍝 Other Italian recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Porcini mushroom risotto on a small plate with fresh dill and parmesan.
Print

Porcini Mushroom Risotto

Porcini mushroom risotto with pearly grains of rice and nutty, plump mushrooms, topped with fresh dill and grated parmesan. Dried porcini mushrooms are used for a greater depth of flavour and the whole dish can be ready in just over 30 minutes.
Course Dinner, evening meal, Main Course, starter or main
Cuisine Italian
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 35 minutes
Servings 2 people
Calories 634kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 50 g Dried porcini mushrooms
  • 20 g Butter
  • 1 Onion finely chopped
  • 1 Garlic clove finely chopped
  • 170 g Carnaroli rice uncooked
  • 150 ml White wine
  • 500 ml Vegetable stock
  • 2 tablespoons Soured cream optional
  • 25 g Parmesan grated and extra to serve
  • ½ Lemon juiced
  • 20 g Fresh dill

Instructions

  • Soak the mushrooms in 500ml of hot water for at least 30 minutes until soft. After 30 minutes remove the mushrooms, reserving the liquid, and roughly chop. Then strain the liquid through a paper-towel lined sieve into a clean bowl.
    50 g Dried porcini mushrooms
  • Melt the butter in a large pan on a medium heat. Add the onions and garlic and fry until soft.
    20 g Butter, 1 Onion, 1 Garlic clove
  • Add the rice and mix in well allowing the melted butter to coat each grain of rice.
    170 g Carnaroli rice
  • Next add the wine and simmer until the wine has nearly all reduced or been absorbed by the rice.
    150 ml White wine
  • Then add two ladles of the mushroom liquid, stirring attentively between each ladleful. Only add the second ladle when the first one has been fully absorbed.
  • At this point switch to the veg stock to ensure the mushroom flavour isn't too overpowering. Add ladlefuls of the veg stock one at a time, again only adding the next ladleful when the previous has absorbed. It will probably take around 15-20 minutes to gradually add the whole lot. By this point the rice should have softened and plumped.
    500 ml Vegetable stock
  • Stir in the soaked mushrooms, soured cream, parmesan and lemon juice.
    2 tablespoons Soured cream, 25 g Parmesan, ½ Lemon juiced
  • Serve with fresh dill.
    20 g Fresh dill

Video

Notes

Mushrooms: Dried porcini mushrooms are used here. However, you can replace with your preferred type of mushroom (fresh or dried). Porcini mushrooms are known for their rich, nutty flavour and meaty texture. Fresh porcini mushrooms are hard to come by as whereas dried porcini are widely available year round. Use a large bowl to soak the dried mushrooms and stir occasionally. The space and stirring will ensure all the mushrooms are fully soaked and plumped up.
Mushroom grit: Dried mushrooms can be gritty. To avoid a gritty risotto the mushrooms can be rinsed after they have been soaked. The soaking liquid will also contain grit, so before adding to the risotto this should be strained through a paper-towel lined sieve. After straining leave it to settle allowing any leftover grit to sink to the bottom. Do not disturb the bottom when adding the liquid to the risotto.
Risotto rice: For risotto rice you are looking for short grains with a high starch content. Look for rice labelled as Arborio, Carnaroli or simply; risotto rice.
Butter: Use butter! Melted butter is used to 'awaken' the rice by coating and softening the uncooked grains so allowing liquids to be easily soaked in. 
Wine: I love the flavour of white wine in risotto and so I add it to all my risotto recipes. But if required it can be replaced with a little apple juice or just left out completely.
Dill: A perfect paring to the earthy mushrooms, but also optional. If preferred leave out or replace with parsley.
Stock: Use good quality stock, both vegetable or a meat based stock will work well. This recipe uses 2 types of stock. The first is mushroom stock, made by soaking the mushrooms. The second is vegetable stock. The mushroom stock will be very strong as dried mushrooms have a very intense flavour, which can be overpowering. Therefore, I suggest only using 2 ladles of the mushroom stock then switch to using vegetable stock. However, feel free to add more mushroom stock for a more intense flavour.
Parmesan: Any hard Italian cheese will work well.
Patience: Risotto does require a little patience. Take your time a don't rush the gradual addition of the stock, I promise its well worth it.
How to store? Risotto is best made fresh. The rice doesn't reheat well and more often than not, reheated risotto will overcook and become sloppy. So do bare this in mind when saving leftovers.

 Transfer any leftovers to sealable containers. Make sure the mushroom risotto has fully cooled before sealing and storing in the fridge for up to 2 days. Cooled risotto will set and become hard. 

Reheat by returning to the pan with a little hot water and stir until heated through and piping hot. (Please note that proper cooling and reheating is essential for rice dishes).
What is the best rice for risotto? Risotto rice has plump, short-medium grains with a high starch content. This gives risotto its well known creamy texture when cooked. Look for Arborio, Carnaroli, Vialone nano or just simply; risotto rice.

 Arborio rice is the most widely available type of risotto rice and produces a lovely thick and soft risotto, but can be susceptible to overcooking (becomes sloppy). 

Carnaroli isn't as easy to find but is known to be the best due to its higher starch content and resistance to overcooking, which pretty much guarantees a thick and creamy risotto every time. 

Vialone nano has smaller, round grains and is considered to be as good as Carnaroli but produces a soupier risotto.

Nutrition

Calories: 634kcal | Carbohydrates: 101g | Protein: 14g | Fat: 15g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 36mg | Sodium: 1299mg | Potassium: 727mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 1729IU | Vitamin C: 17mg | Calcium: 217mg | Iron: 5mg

This post was first published in Nov 2015. Updated in Feb 2022 with an improved recipe, new images, step by step instructions and expert tips.

The post Porcini Mushroom Risotto appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/mushroom-risotto-with-porcini/feed/ 0
Red Lentil Dahl https://properfoodie.com/red-lentil-tarka-dahl/ https://properfoodie.com/red-lentil-tarka-dahl/#comments Tue, 08 Feb 2022 18:57:13 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=2768 Red lentil dahl flavoured with Indian spices and simmered in vine ripened tomatoes. A nutritious, vegan curry that will warm you up, keep you going through winter and can be on the table in just 30 minutes. 👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe Really healthy and packed full of protein, fibre, vitamins and minerals, this red...

Read More

The post Red Lentil Dahl appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Red lentil dahl flavoured with Indian spices and simmered in vine ripened tomatoes. A nutritious, vegan curry that will warm you up, keep you going through winter and can be on the table in just 30 minutes.

Lentil dahl in a wide skillet pan and topped with yogurt and parsley.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

Really healthy and packed full of protein, fibre, vitamins and minerals, this red lentil dahl is one curry that can be thoroughly enjoyed guilt free. If you fancy a meat free night or are indeed vegetarian or vegan, then this spicy curry recipe is a great option. Its also simple to prepare and uses basic ingredients that won't break the bank.

🥘 Ingredients

This recipe makes enough red lentil dahl to serve 4 people.

Tarka dahl ingredients.

Ingredient notes

Measurements: For the amounts required, see the recipe card below and also use the toggle button to see the recipe in cups.

Lentils: Use good quality, freshly bought lentils to ensure good taste and texture. Opt for any variety of lentil but always check packet instructions. If you prefer swap lentils for beans, chickpeas or split peas.

Yogurt: Yogurt is an optional topping, but its creamy and cooling nature works really well with the heat from the spices. Choose plain yogurt.

Vine tomatoes: Opt for vine ripened tomatoes for that earthy, sunshine flavour. If you can't get hold of vine ripened, use tinned chopped or plum tomatoes which also hold plenty of flavour.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Simmer lentils in water for 10-15 minutes or until soft, then drain and set to one side.
  2. Heat up the oil in a large frying pan, add the cumin seeds and fry for 30 seconds or until golden brown (be careful not to burn them).
  3. As soon as the seeds start to change colour add in the chopped onion and garlic and cook on a gentle heat until soft.
  4. Next add the tomatoes, chillies, drained lentils, spices and tomato puree.Four images showing how to make red lentil dahl step by step for steps 1-4.
  5. Mix well and simmer for a couple of minutes, then taste and season if required. If you want to make the Dahl more soup-like or creamy you can add stock or coconut milk at this point, stir in well and bring to a simmer.
  6. Finally; remove from the heat, stir in the chopped coriander and serve with plain yogurt.Two images showing how to make Red lentil dahl for steps 5-6.

💭 Expert tips

Lentils: Choose good quality lentils and don't use old ones. Rinse well under running tap water before cooking to remove any dust or dirt. Don't overcook! Cook until just soft and check packet instructions for recommended cooking times.

Frying cumin seeds: Add a couple of cumin seeds to test the heat of the oil. If the seeds bubble then the oil is hot enough. Add the rest of the seeds but only cook briefly, until just golden brown, before adding the onions. Be aware that cumin seeds are quick to burn, which will create a bitter taste throughout the dish.

Soupier version: For a version thats creamier or more soup-like add a tin of coconut milk or 400ml of stock.

Make it your own: Add chickpeas or split peas, or completely swap the lentils for one of these. Try with different types of lentils (green, yellow) or add vegetables such as roasted squash, roast cauliflower, courgette or aubergine. And for an extra protein boost try with shredded chicken or poached fish.

❓ Frequently asked questions

Should lentils be soaked before cooking?

No its not necessary to soak lentils before cooking. It is however, good practise to rinse and drain thoroughly before cooking. Lentils are very small and so its not uncommon for dirt and dust to get mixed in during packaging.

Is red lentil dahl healthy?

Dahl is packed full of nutrients and provides a good source of vitamins, minerals and fibre. Lentils are also high in protein and low in fat so they are great substitute for meat.

Storage?

Leftovers? Once fully cooled you can transfer any leftover lentil dahl to a sealable container. Seal and keep in the fridge for 2-3 days or freeze for up to 1 month. To reheat defrost thoroughly in the fridge overnight (if frozen) then transfer to a pan and heat until piping hot throughout.

Red lentil dahl in a wide cast iron pan and topped with yogurt and parsley.

🍛 Other curry recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Red lentil dahl in a wide cast iron pan and topped with yogurt and parsley
Print

Red Lentil Dahl

Red lentil dahl flavoured with Indian spices and simmered in vine ripened tomatoes. A nutritious, vegan curry that will warm you up, keep you going through winter and can be on the table in just 30 minutes.
Course Dinner, main meal
Cuisine Indian
Diet Gluten Free, Low Fat, Vegan, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 4 People
Calories 359kcal

Ingredients

  • 300 g dried red lentils rinsed well
  • Boiled water double the volume of lentils

  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon cumin seeds
  • 2 onions finely chopped
  • 2 cloves garlic finely chopped
  • 350 g of vine tomatoes roughly chopped
  • 2 green chillies deseeded and finely chopped

  • 1 teaspoon ginger powder
  • ½ teaspoon turmeric
  • 1 teaspoon garam masala
  • 3 tablespoon tomato puree
  • Salt and pepper to taste
  • Handful fresh coriander chopped
  • Plain yogurt to serve
  • Tin of coconut milk or 400ml of stock optional, for a more soup-like version

Instructions

  • Simmer lentils in water for 10-15 minutes or until soft, then drain and set to one side.
    300 g dried red lentils, Boiled water
  • Heat up the oil in a large frying pan, add the cumin seeds and fry for 30 seconds or until golden brown (be careful not to burn them).
    1 tablespoon olive oil, 1 teaspoon cumin seeds
  • As soon as the seeds start to change colour add in the chopped onion and garlic and cook on a gentle heat until soft.
    2 onions, 2 cloves garlic
  • Next add the tomatoes, chillies, drained lentils, spices and tomato puree.
    350 g of vine tomatoes, 2 green chillies, 1 teaspoon ginger powder, ½ teaspoon turmeric, 1 teaspoon garam masala, 3 tablespoon tomato puree
  • Mix well and simmer for a couple of minutes, then taste and season if required. If you want to make the Dahl more soup-like or creamy you can add stock or coconut milk at this point, stir in well and bring to a simmer.
    Salt and pepper to taste, Tin of coconut milk or 400ml of stock
  • Finally; remove from the heat, stir in the chopped coriander and serve with plain yogurt.
    Handful fresh coriander chopped, Plain yogurt

Video

Notes

Lentils: Use good quality, freshly bought lentils to ensure good taste and texture. Opt for any variety of lentil but always check packet instructions. If you prefer swap lentils for beans, chickpeas or split peas. Rinse well under running tap water before cooking to remove any dust or dirt. Don't overcook! Cook until just soft and check packet instructions for recommended cooking times.
Yogurt: Yogurt is an optional topping, but its creamy and cooling nature works really well with the heat from the spices. Choose plain yogurt.
Vine tomatoes: Opt for vine ripened tomatoes for that earthy, sunshine flavour. If you can't get hold of vine ripened, use tinned chopped or plum tomatoes which also hold plenty of flavour.
Frying cumin seeds: Add a couple of cumin seeds to test the heat of the oil. If the seeds bubble then the oil is hot enough. Add the rest of the seeds but only cook briefly, until just golden brown, before adding the onions. Be aware that cumin seeds are quick to burn, which will create a bitter taste throughout the dish.
Soupier version: For a version thats creamier or more soup-like add a tin of coconut milk or 400ml of stock.
Make it your own: Add chickpeas or split peas, or completely swap the lentils for one of these. Try with different types of lentils (green, yellow) or add vegetables such as roasted squash, roast cauliflower, courgette or aubergine. And for an extra protein boost try with shredded chicken or poached fish.
Should lentils be soaked before cooking?
No its not necessary to soak lentils before cooking. It is however, good practise to rinse and drain thoroughly before cooking. Lentils are very small and so its not uncommon for dirt and dust to get mixed in during packaging.
Is red lentil dahl healthy?
Dahl is packed full of nutrients and provides a good source of vitamins, minerals and fibre. Lentils are also high in protein and low in fat so they are great substitute for meat.
Storage?
Leftovers? Once fully cooled you can transfer any leftover lentil dahl to a sealable container. Seal and keep in the fridge for 2-3 days or freeze for up to 1 month. To reheat defrost thoroughly in the fridge overnight (if frozen) then transfer to a pan and heat until piping hot throughout.

Nutrition

Calories: 359kcal | Carbohydrates: 58g | Protein: 22g | Fat: 5g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Cholesterol: 1mg | Sodium: 144mg | Potassium: 1100mg | Fiber: 26g | Sugar: 8g | Vitamin A: 837IU | Vitamin C: 24mg | Calcium: 86mg | Iron: 7mg

This post was first published in Nov 2016. Updated in Jan 2022 with an improved recipe, new images, step by step instructions and expert tips.

A warming Red lentil tarka dahl with gluten free roti breads

 

The post Red Lentil Dahl appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/red-lentil-tarka-dahl/feed/ 8
Smoked Haddock Risotto https://properfoodie.com/haddock-rosemary-risotto/ https://properfoodie.com/haddock-rosemary-risotto/#comments Sat, 29 Jan 2022 19:42:45 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=1863 Creamy smoked haddock risotto flavoured with fresh rosemary and gently simmered in a pan of white wine, whole milk and vegetable stock. The fish is delicately poached beforehand and the whole recipe takes just over 30 minutes to make. 👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe If you've never made risotto before, this is the perfect recipe...

Read More

The post Smoked Haddock Risotto appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Creamy smoked haddock risotto flavoured with fresh rosemary and gently simmered in a pan of white wine, whole milk and vegetable stock. The fish is delicately poached beforehand and the whole recipe takes just over 30 minutes to make.

Creamy smoked haddock risotto piled neatly on a small plate, with parmesan being sprinkle on top.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Please note that this post contains affiliate links, which means if you click the link and then go on to purchase, I will receive a percentage of the cost. See my privacy policy and disclosure statement for further details.

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

If you've never made risotto before, this is the perfect recipe for first timers and risotto experts alike. With minimal fuss and ingredients, this smoked haddock risotto is easy to nurture into a pillowy pot of rice, with plenty of bite still left in each grain.

This is a warming, wholesome dish that is made by, simply and gradually, adding milky stock to starchy rice. A great option for the whole family, any night of the week.

🥘 Ingredients

This recipe makes enough smoked haddock risotto to serve 2 people (or 4 starter-sized portions):

Ingredients for making fish risotto.

Ingredient notes

Measurements: For the amounts required, see the recipe card below and also use the toggle button to see the recipe in cups.

Risotto rice: For risotto rice you are looking for short grains with a high starch content. Look for rice labelled as Arborio, Carnaroli or simply; risotto rice.

Smoked Haddock: Smoked haddock gives risotto the most incredible flavour and in my opinion its the best fish to serve with this dish.

However, if you prefer you can opt for unsmoked haddock or smoked haddock that isn't dyed or try with another white, chunky fish such as cod instead.

Milk: This recipe uses whole milk, which adds to the creaminess of the risotto. If you prefer, use skimmed or semi skimmed or replace the milk completely with stock. Any of these options will result in a less creamy risotto.

Parmesan: Any hard Italian cheese will work well.

Wine: I love the flavour of white wine in risotto and so in my book, its always a must. But if required it can be replaced with a little apple juice or just left out completely.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Poach the smoked haddock in milk and stock. Then remove skin and flake the fish. save the poaching liquid (fish stock).
  2. Cook onion and garlic in butter in a wide pan. Then add risotto rice and stir to coat each grain in butter.
  3. Next, add the wine and cook until it has nearly all reduced.
  4. Add rosemary and gradually start to add fish stock.4 step by step images showing how to make smoked haddock risotto 1-4.
  5. Gradually add all the stock until the rice is soft and plump.
  6. Stir in grated parmesan and lemon juice. 
  7. Hot water can also be added to loosen the risotto if you prefer a slightly soupier consistency. Once you're happy with the risotto, stir in the flaked smoked haddock.
  8. Top with fresh parsley and extra grated parmesan and serve.4 process images for making fish risotto for steps 5-8.

💭 Expert tips

Butter: Use butter! A good helping of butter is always the best starting point for any risotto dish. Melted butter is used to 'awaken' the rice by coating and softening the uncooked grains so allowing liquids to be easily soaked in. 

Patience: Risotto does require a little patience. Take your time a don't rush the gradual addition of the stock, I promise its well worth it.

Poaching haddock: This is a delicate approach to cooking the fish, which keeps it moist and flaky. The fish juices will also flavours the milky stock, which is then added to the risotto.

❓ Frequently asked questions

What is the best rice for risotto?

Risotto rice is usually plump, short-medium grains with a high starch content. This gives risotto its well known creamy texture when cooked. In the shops look for rice labelled as Arborio, Carnaroli, Vialone nano or just simply; risotto rice.

Arborio rice is the most widely available type of risotto rice and produces a lovely thick and soft risotto, but can be susceptible to overcooking (becomes sloppy).

Carnaroli isn't as easy to find in the shops but is known to be the best due to its higher starch content and resistance to overcooking, which pretty much guarantees a thick and creamy risotto every time. Vialone nano has smaller, round grains and is considered to be as good as Carnaroli but produces a soupier risotto.

What is the best pan for cooking risotto?

The key to cooking risotto is a large surface area and allowing the rice to cook thoroughly and evenly in the stock. So any type of pan will do as long as it has a wide base. I recommend using a 30cm wide pan. A non-stick pan isn't essential so long as you pay close attention to the rice and maintain a good stir.

How do you know when risotto is cooked?

Taste the risotto, it should be soft and creamy. The grains should be firm but not chalky. If the rice still has a chalky bite, stir in a ladle of hot water and cook for a couple more minutes.

How to store?

Risotto is best made fresh. The rice doesn't reheat well and more often than not, reheated risotto will overcook and become sloppy. So do bare this in mind when saving leftovers.

Transfer any leftovers to sealable containers. Make sure the risotto has fully cooled before sealing and storing in the fridge for up to 2 days. Cooled risotto will set and become hard. Reheat by returning to the pan with a little hot water and stir until heated through and piping hot. (Please note that proper cooling and reheating is essential for rice dishes).

Large shallow casserole dish filled with creamy smoked haddock risotto and topped with parsley.

🍝 Other Italian recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Creamy smoked haddock risotto piled neatly on a small plate, with parmesan being sprinkle on top.
Print

Smoked Haddock Risotto

Creamy smoked haddock risotto flavoured with fresh rosemary and gently simmered in a pan of white wine, whole milk and vegetable stock. The fish is delicately poached in the warm stock and milk beforehand and the whole recipe takes just over 30 minutes to make.
Course Dinner, Main Course, starter or main
Cuisine Italian
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 25 minutes
Total Time 35 minutes
Servings 2 people
Calories 833kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 2 fillets 280g of smoked haddock
  • 450 ml vegetable stock
  • 450 ml whole milk
  • 20 g butter
  • 1 onion finely chopped
  • 1 garlic clove finely chopped
  • 170 g risotto rice
  • 150 ml white wine
  • 1 sprig fresh rosemary
  • 1 lemon juiced
  • 25 g grated parmesan or other hard Italian cheese
  • 15 g fresh chopped parsley
  • Extra parmesan to serve

Instructions

To poach the fish:

  • Pour the cold stock and milk into a wide pan. Stir together then place in the haddock fillets and bring the pan to a simmer. Gently poach for 3 minutes making sure the pan doesn’t boil. Then remove the fish with a slotted spoon and break into chunky flakes, discarding any skin. Keep the milky stock warm in the pan ready for making the risotto.

To make the risotto:

  • Melt the butter in a wide (30cm) pan. Add the chopped onion and garlic and cook until soft. Then add the risotto rice and stir into the onion allowing the melted butter to coat and gently warm each grain.
  • Next, add the wine and cook until it has nearly all reduced.
  • Add the sprig off rosemary and then start to add the milky stock one ladle at a time. Stir attentively between each addition, only adding another ladleful when the previous one has been fully absorbed.
  • Make sure all the milky stock goes into the risotto. It will probably take around 15-20 minutes to gradually add the whole lot. By this point the rice should have softened and plumped.
  • Add the grated parmesan and lemon juice. Stir in well and keep cooking for a further minute to allow the lemon juice to absorb. Taste the risotto, it should be soft and creamy. The grains should be firm but not chalky. If the rice still has a chalky bite, stir in a ladle of hot water and cook for a couple more minutes.
  • Hot water can also be added to loosen the risotto if you prefer a slightly soupier consistency. Once you're happy with the risotto, stir in the flaked smoked haddock.
  • Top with fresh parsley and extra grated parmesan and serve.

Video

Notes

Risotto rice: For risotto rice you are looking for short grains with a high starch content. Look for rice labelled as Arborio, Carnaroli, Vialone nano or simply; risotto rice.
Smoked Haddock: Smoked haddock gives risotto the most incredible flavour and in my opinion its the best fish to serve with this dish. However, if you prefer you can opt for unsmoked haddock or smoked haddock that isn't dyed or try with another white, chunky fish such as cod instead.
Milk: This recipe uses whole milk, which adds to the creaminess of the risotto. If you prefer, use skimmed or semi skimmed or replace the milk completely with stock. Any of these options will result in a less creamy risotto.
Parmesan: Any hard Italian cheese will work well.
Wine: I love the flavour of white wine in risotto and so in my book, its always a must. But if required it can be replaced with a little apple juice or just left out completely.
Butter: Use butter! A good helping of butter is always the best starting point for any risotto dish. Melted butter is used to 'awaken' the rice by coating and softening the uncooked grains so allowing liquids to be easily soaked in. 
Patience: Risotto does require a little patience. Take your time a don't rush the gradual addition of the stock, I promise its well worth it.
Poaching haddock: This is a delicate approach to cooking the fish, which keeps it moist and flaky. The fish juices will also flavours the milky stock, which is then added to the risotto.
What is the best rice for risotto? Risotto rice is usually plump, short-medium grains with a high starch content. This gives risotto its well known creamy texture when cooked. In the shops look for rice labelled as Arborio, Carnaroli, Vialone nano or just simply; risotto rice. 


Arborio rice is the most widely available type of risotto rice and produces a lovely thick and soft risotto, but can be susceptible to overcooking (becomes sloppy). Carnaroli isn't as easy to find in the shops but is known to be the best due to its higher starch content and resistance to overcooking, which pretty much guarantees a thick and creamy risotto every time. Vialone nano has smaller, round grains and is considered to be as good as Carnaroli but produces a soupier risotto.
How to store? Risotto is best made fresh. The rice doesn't reheat well and more often than not, reheated risotto will overcook and become sloppy. So do bare this in mind when saving leftovers. 


Transfer any leftovers to sealable containers. Make sure the risotto has fully cooled before sealing and storing in the fridge for up to 2 days. Cooled risotto will set and become hard. Reheat by returning to the pan with a little hot water and stir until heated through and piping hot. (Please note that proper cooling and reheating is essential for rice dishes).
What is the best pan for cooking risotto? The key to cooking risotto is a large surface area and allowing the rice to cook thoroughly and evenly in the stock. So any type of pan will do as long as it has a wide base. I recommend using a 30cm wide pan. A non-stick pan isn't essential so long as you pay close attention to the rice and maintain a good stir.

Nutrition

Calories: 833kcal | Carbohydrates: 91g | Protein: 54g | Fat: 21g | Saturated Fat: 12g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 163mg | Sodium: 2339mg | Potassium: 1158mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 17g | Vitamin A: 1949IU | Vitamin C: 17mg | Calcium: 501mg | Iron: 7mg

This post was first published in May 2016. Updated in Jan 2022 with an improved recipe, new images, step by step instructions and expert tips.

 

The post Smoked Haddock Risotto appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/haddock-rosemary-risotto/feed/ 6
Roast Chicken https://properfoodie.com/roast-chicken/ https://properfoodie.com/roast-chicken/#respond Sun, 17 Oct 2021 16:55:55 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=12279 Roast chicken with lemon herb butter, cooked until golden on the outside and tender and juicy on the inside. This simple recipe shows how easy it is to make roast chicken for your Sunday dinner with minimal fuss and maximum flavour. 👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe A whole roast chicken is a great option for...

Read More

The post Roast Chicken appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Roast chicken with lemon herb butter, cooked until golden on the outside and tender and juicy on the inside. This simple recipe shows how easy it is to make roast chicken for your Sunday dinner with minimal fuss and maximum flavour.

whole chicken roasted and presented on a large plate with cooked carrots and onions and fresh herbs.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

A whole roast chicken is a great option for Sunday dinner at home. Roast chicken is smaller, cheaper and easier to cook than any other roast dinner option. However, Roast beef, Roast Turkey or Leg of lamb are also achievable, but may just require a little more time, effort and expense.

This recipe is all about roasting that perfect chicken with a glistening skin that has been lovingly basted with lemon herb butter. With very little time and effort you can make a succulent whole roast chicken that will go down a storm, especially when served up with all the trimmings. Try with homemade Yorkshire Puddings, crispy roast potatoes, creamy mash potatoes, cauliflower cheese, honey glazed carrots and parsnips, green bean almondine and of course lashings of gravy.

🥘 Ingredients

To make a whole roast chicken with lemon and herb butter you will need:

  • 50g Softened butter
  • 2 cloves Garlic
  • Zest and juice of ½ lemon
  • 3 Sprigs fresh thyme (leaves removed from stems)
  • 1.5 kg Whole chicken
  • 2 Springs rosemary
  • 3 Sprigs thyme
  • 2 Bay leaves
  • ½ Lemon
  • ½ Garlic bulb
  • Salt and pepper
  • Roughly chopped root veggies

Ingredient notes

Recipe: For the full recipe and amounts required, see the recipe card below and use the toggle button to see the recipe in cups.

Garlic: This recipe uses fresh garlic but you could substitute with jarred garlic or garlic paste.

Fresh herbs: This recipe uses fresh herbs for the both the butter and chicken. However, if you can't get hold of fresh you can replace each with a teaspoon of dried herbs.

Root vegetables: The root vegetables are used as a rack for the chicken to sit on. I prefer to use veg as it adds to the flavour. However, if you have a metal rack for your roasting tin you can just use this instead.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Pre heat the oven to 190°C (Fan) / 375°F. Prepare the herb butter by mashing the butter with minced garlic, lemon juice and zest and fresh thyme leaves. Then set to one side.
  2. Unpack the chicken and remove any giblets from the cavity. If the legs are tied together, un-tie and open up to see inside the cavity. Place half a lemon, half a garlic bulb inside the cavity. Next take 2 sprigs of rosemary, together with 3 sprigs of thyme and wrap 2 bay leaves around the sprigs. Secure the bunch of fresh herbs by wrapping and tying with string. Add the bunch of herbs to the cavity along with the lemon and garlic.
  3. Next, take the lemon herb butter and use the back of a spoon to spread the butter all over the surface of the chicken skin. Make sure to spread over the legs and wings as well.
  4. Once the butter is evenly spread, bring the legs back together to close the entrance to the cavity and tie with string.Four images showing how to cook a whole roast chicken steps 1-4.
  5. Roughly chop up some root vegetables to sit in the base of the roasting tin to act as a rack for the chicken. Carefully transfer the prepared chicken onto the vegetable rack.
  6. Place the roasting tin into the centre of the preheated oven and cook according to the weight of the bird: Cook for 20 minutes per lb or per 500g, plus an extra 20 minutes after this. Check the chicken at least once (ideally 2 or 3 times) during cooking and baste (spoon juices back over the skin). If the skin looks like it might be burning at any point, pop over a bit of foil.
  7. Check the chicken is cooked by inserting a skewer into the breast. The juices should run out clear. Alternatively insert a meat thermometer into the breast. If the chicken appears under cooked place back in the oven for 10 minute intervals until cooked. Then cover and rest for around 10 minutes. You can use this time to dish up the rest of your Sunday roast.
  8. After the chicken is well rested, remove the foil and transfer the chicken to a carving board. Carve with a sharp knife and serve.Four images showing how to cook a whole roast chicken steps 5-8..

💭 Expert tips

  • If using fresh garlic in the herb butter: Mince the garlic by chopping finely, then add a pinch of sea salt and scrape the knife over the garlic and salt to create a garlic paste.
  • Cook the chicken on a bed of chopped carrots and onions, which raises the chicken up out of its juices. This adds to the flavour and releases moisture during cooking, which helps to keep the meat succulent. 
  • Coat the skin in the lemon herb butter before cooking to add flavour and to keep moisture in.
  • Sit the chicken on a rack of chopped veg (which will release moisture) to help prevent the meat from drying out.
  • Baste the chicken two or three times during cooking to keep the flavour in and to help the skin cook and turn golden brown.

❓ Frequently asked questions

Do you cover roast chicken?

Covering a chicken with foil during roasting is not necessary and I much prefer to leave the skin uncovered giving it plenty of time to turn to a nice golden brown colour. Follow the tips above to ensure the meat stays nice and juicy.

How long does it take to roast a chicken?

As a general rule chicken should be roasted for 20 minutes per lb or per 500g, plus an extra 20 minutes after that. So a 1.5kg chicken would need 1 hour 20 minutes and a 2kg chicken would need 1 hour 40 minutes. During roasting the chicken should be checked at least once (2 or 3 times if you can) and basted with the juices.

What oven temperature for roast chicken?

To make sure a chicken is thoroughly cooked, it should be roasted at approximately 180-190°C (Fan) / 350-375°F. You can pick the higher or lower end of this depending on how your oven cooks.

What temperature should a thermometer read for chicken?

You should be looking for the thermometer to reach 75°C / 165°F when inserted into the middle of the chicken breast. 

Whole roast chicken with golden skin served on a large plate surrounded by roast carrots, onions and fresh herbs.

🥘 Other sunday roast recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

whole chicken roasted and presented on a large plate with cooked carrots and onions and fresh herbs.
Print

Roast Chicken

Roast chicken with lemon herb butter, cooked until golden on the outside and tender and juicy on the inside. This simple recipe shows how easy it is to make roast chicken for your Sunday dinner with minimal fuss and maximum flavour.
Course Dinner, roast dinner, sunday dinner, sunday lunch
Cuisine British
Prep Time 25 minutes
Cook Time 1 hour 20 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 45 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 496kcal

Equipment

  • Medium mixing bowl
  • String (for tying herbs together and for tying together chicken legs)
  • Large roasting tin
  • Carving knife

Ingredients

For the lemon herb butter

  • 50 g Softened butter
  • 2 cloves Garlic
  • ½ lemon juiced and zested
  • 3 Sprigs fresh thyme leaves removed from stems

For the chicken:

  • 1.5 kg Whole chicken
  • ½ Lemon
  • ½ Garlic bulb
  • 2 Springs rosemary
  • 3 Sprigs thyme
  • 2 Bay leaves
  • Salt and pepper
  • Root veggies roughly chopped to sit the chicken on in the tray

Instructions

  • Pre heat the oven to 190°C (Fan) / 375°F. Prepare the herb butter by mashing the butter with minced garlic, lemon juice and zest and fresh thyme leaves. Set to one side. 
NOTE: Mash together using a fork.
    50 g Softened butter, 2 cloves Garlic, ½ lemon juiced and zested, 3 Sprigs fresh thyme
  • Remove and discard any packaging from the chicken. If you have bought the chicken from your butchers check the cavity for the giblets. Remove and discard the giblets or if you prefer use to make gravy.
If the legs are tied together, un-tie and open up to see inside the cavity. Place half a lemon, half a garlic bulb inside the cavity. Next take 2 sprigs of rosemary, together with 3 sprigs of thyme and wrap 2 bay leaves around the sprigs. Secure the bunch of fresh herbs by wrapping and tying with string. Add the bunch of herbs to the cavity along with the lemon and garlic.
    1.5 kg Whole chicken, 2 Springs rosemary, 3 Sprigs thyme, ½ Lemon, ½ Garlic bulb, 2 Bay leaves
  • Next, take the lemon herb butter and use the back of a spoon to spread the butter all over the surface of the chicken skin. Make sure to spread over the legs and wings as well. Sprinkle salt and pepper over the top of the butter.
    Salt and pepper
  • Once the butter is evenly spread, bring the legs back together to close the entrance to the cavity and tie with string.
  • Roughly chop up some root vegetables to sit in the base of the roasting tin to act as a rack for the chicken. Carefully transfer the prepared chicken onto the vegetable rack.
    Root veggies roughly chopped to sit the chicken on in the tray
  • Place the roasting tin into the centre of the preheated oven and cook according to the weight of the bird: Cook for 20 minutes per lb or per 500g, plus an extra 20 minutes after this. Check the chicken at least once (ideally 2 or 3 times) during cooking and baste (spoon juices back over the skin). If the skin looks like it might be burning at any point, pop over a bit of foil.
  • Check the chicken is cooked by inserting a skewer into the breast. The juices should run out clear. Alternatively insert a meat thermometer into the breast. If the chicken appears under cooked place back in the oven for 10 minute intervals until cooked.
If you are satisfied that the chicken is thoroughly cooked, cover with foil and then a tea towel (to keep the heat in) and rest for around 10 minutes. You can use this time to dish up the rest of your Sunday roast.
  • After the chicken is well rested, remove the foil and transfer the chicken to a carving board. Carve with a sharp knife and serve.

Video

Notes

Garlic: This recipe uses fresh garlic but you could substitute with jarred garlic or garlic paste.
Fresh herbs: This recipe uses fresh herbs for the both the butter and chicken. However, if you can't get hold of fresh you can replace each with a teaspoon of dried herbs.
Root vegetables: the root vegetables are used as a rack for the chicken to sit on. I prefer to use veg as it adds to the flavour. However, if you have a metal rack for your roasting tin you can just use this instead.
Do you cover roast chicken? Covering a chicken with foil during roasting is not necessary and I much prefer to leave the skin uncovered giving it plenty of time to turn to a nice golden brown colour. Follow the ‘expert tips’ in the post above to ensure the meat stays nice and juicy.
How long does it take to roast a chicken? As a general rule chicken should be roasted for 20 minutes per lb or per 500g, plus an extra 20 minutes after that. So a 1.5kg chicken would need 1 hour 20 minutes and a 2kg chicken would need 1 hour 40 minutes. During roasting the chicken should be checked at least once (2 or 3 times if you can) and basted with the juices.
What oven temperature for roast chicken? To make sure a chicken is thoroughly cooked, it should be roasted at approximately 180-190°C (Fan) / 350-375°F. You can pick the higher or lower end of this depending on how your oven cooks.
What temperature should a thermometer read for chicken? If you like to use a meat thermometer to check that your chicken is cooked through, you should be looking for the thermometer to reach 75°C / 165°F when inserted into the middle of the chicken breast. 

Nutrition

Serving: 394g | Calories: 496kcal | Carbohydrates: 5g | Protein: 34g | Fat: 38g | Saturated Fat: 14g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 6g | Monounsaturated Fat: 14g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 162mg | Sodium: 217mg | Potassium: 429mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 882IU | Vitamin C: 21mg | Calcium: 62mg | Iron: 3mg

This post was first published in Feb 2020. Updated in Oct 2021 with new step by step instructions and expert tips.

 

 

 

The post Roast Chicken appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/roast-chicken/feed/ 0
Massaman Curry https://properfoodie.com/massaman-curry/ https://properfoodie.com/massaman-curry/#respond Mon, 11 Oct 2021 21:14:32 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=11893 Massaman curry recipe made with an aromatic curry paste, chunks of juicy chicken, sliced new potatoes and a Thai coconut cream sauce. Great served up with cashew nuts, sliced red chillies and fragrant fresh coriander. 👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe Massaman is a mild Thai curry recipe made with a yellow Massaman curry paste, coconut...

Read More

The post Massaman Curry appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Massaman curry recipe made with an aromatic curry paste, chunks of juicy chicken, sliced new potatoes and a Thai coconut cream sauce. Great served up with cashew nuts, sliced red chillies and fragrant fresh coriander.

A bowl of chicken and potato curry in a coconut cream sauce.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

Massaman is a mild Thai curry recipe made with a yellow Massaman curry paste, coconut milk and potatoes. Massaman curry recipes tends to be milder and sweeter than other Thai curries due to the addition of spices like cinnamon, star anise and cardamom. So its a great option if you're not a fan of spicy foods and whats more this lovely curry can be made and on the table within 45 minutes.

Massaman is the mildest of the Thai curries, so opt for the more spicy Thai red curry or Thai green curry if you're after something with a bit more heat.

🥘 Ingredients

To make massaman curry for 4 people you will need:

  • ½ tablespoon Oil
  • 1 Garlic clove finely chopped 
  • 1 Onion sliced
  • 2 Chicken Breasts cubed (360g)
  • 25g potatoes, chopped into bite sized pieces
  • 2 tablespoon Massaman Curry paste (homemade or shop bought)
  • 400ml tin of Coconut milk (full fat)
  • 1 teaspoon sugar
  • 1 Star anise
  • 100g sugar snap peas (roughly chopped)
  • ½ teaspoon Fish sauce
  • ½ a lime juiced
  • Toppings: Fresh coriander, sliced red chillies and chopped cashew nuts

Ingredient notes

Recipe: For the full recipe and amounts required, see the recipe card below and use the toggle button to see the recipe in cups.

Chicken: This recipe uses raw chicken. However, cooked shredded chicken can also be used. This means you could buy a rotisserie chicken or use leftover chicken from a previous meal.

Potatoes: Choose a waxy variety that will hold together well such as Charlotte, Anya, baby or new potatoes. Leave the skins on for a more rustic finish and to add more fibre to your meal.

Coconut milk: Coconut milk is the base of most Thai curries. However, if you need a different option the best replacement in terms of consistency and flavour is cream. This can be a little heavy so you could also use yogurt (full fat).

Fish sauce: Fish sauce is the main seasoning ingredient in Thai cooking and completely transforms the dish. I highly recommend using fish sauce in this recipe for the best flavour. If you can't get hold of any or if you are making a vegetarian curry, you can substitute with soy sauce, Worcestershire sauce or seaweed paste.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Place a large pan on a medium heat and the oil, garlic and sliced onions and gently fry until starting to soften. Next add the chicken and stir fry to seal off the edges of the meat.
  2. Add the sliced potatoes to the chicken and onions and continue to stir fry for 2 to 3 minutes so allowing the potatoes to start cooking. Then transfer the contents of the pan to a large bowl and set to one side.
  3. Return the pan to the heat and add 2 large tablespoon of Massaman curry paste (homemade or shop bought). Cook for a minute or so and allow the paste to release its flavours. Turn the pan to a low heat and stir in the coconut milk, sugar and star anise.
  4. When the sauce has heated through add the partially cooked chicken, potatoes and onions and mix in until well coated in the sauce. Bring the pan to a very gentle simmer then place on a lid and cook for 20 minutes or until the chicken is cooked through and the potatoes are soft.Four images showing how to make Thai chicken and potato curry steps 1-4.
  5. Next add the chopped sugar snap peas to the curry and simmer for a further 2 minutes.
  6. Find and remove the star anise. Then taste the curry and season to your liking with lime juice and fish sauce.Two images showing how to make massaman curry steps 5 and 6.
  7. Serve and top with freshly sliced red chillies, fresh coriander leaves and chopped cashews nuts.

💭 Expert tips

Chicken massaman curry: The chicken can be replace with your preferred meat or fish (lamb or cod are good options). Or swap in for veggies (courgette, aubergine, sweet potato) if you want to make a vegetarian tikka masala.

Coconut milk: This will have separated in the can so give it a shake and a stir before adding to the pan.

Spicy massaman curry: For an extra kick add in sliced chilli pepper or a few drops of Tabasco or a teaspoon of hot chilli powder.

❓ Frequently asked questions

How to store?

Once made, allow the massaman curry to completely cool then transfer to a sealable container and keep in the fridge for 2 days or or in the freezer for up to 3 months. Defrost in the fridge overnight. Reheat in a pan or in the microwave until piping hot throughout.

What to serve with massaman curry?

Serve up with a helping of jasmine rice or plain rice, plus extra cashew nuts, fresh chilli and fresh coriander.

What is the difference between Massaman curry and Yellow curry?

Massaman curry is a type of yellow curry but isn't exactly the same as Thai yellow curry. The paste used in Massaman curry starts off as Thai yellow curry paste but extra, sweeter spices are mixed into this to create the Massaman flavour.  

What flavour is massaman?

Massaman is a very mild, sweet Thai curry. The flavours of the cinnamom and cardamom really stand out and the milder sauce means you can really taste the coconut milk. The addition of potatoes helps to provide a thicker consistency to the sauce

A bowl of Thai curry made with chicken, sliced potatoes and massaman curry sauce.

🍛 Other easy homemade curry recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

A bowl of massaman curry with sliced new potatoes and chunks of chicken.
Print

Massaman Curry

Massaman curry recipe made with an aromatic curry paste, chunks of juicy chicken, sliced new potatoes and a Thai coconut cream sauce. Great served up with cashew nuts, sliced red chillies and fragrant fresh coriander.
Course Dinner, Main Course, main meal
Cuisine Thai, Thailand
Prep Time 25 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 45 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 440kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • ½ tablespoon Oil
  • 1 Garlic clove finely chopped
  • 1 Onion sliced
  • 3 Chicken Breasts cubed 500g
  • 250 g potatoes chopped into bite sized pieces
  • 2 tablespoon Massaman Curry paste homemade or shop bought
  • 400 ml tin of Coconut milk full fat
  • 1 teaspoon sugar
  • 1 Star anise
  • 100 g sugar snap peas roughly chopped
  • ½ teaspoon Fish sauce
  • ½ a lime juiced
  • Toppings: Fresh coriander sliced red chillies and chopped cashew nuts

Instructions

  • Place a large pan on a medium heat and the oil, garlic and sliced onions and gently fry until starting to soften. Next add the chicken and stir fry to seal off the edges of the meat.
    ½ tablespoon Oil, 1 Garlic clove finely chopped, 1 Onion sliced, 3 Chicken Breasts cubed
  • Add the sliced potatoes to the chicken and onions and continue to stir fry for 2 to 3 minutes so allowing the potatoes to start cooking. Then transfer the contents of the pan to a large bowl and set to one side.
    250 g potatoes
  • Return the pan to the heat and add 2 large tablespoon of Massaman curry paste (homemade or shop bought). Cook for a minute or so and allow the paste to release its flavours. Turn the pan to a low heat and stir in the coconut milk, sugar and star anise.
    2 tablespoon Massaman Curry paste, 400 ml tin of Coconut milk, 1 teaspoon sugar, 1 Star anise
  • When the sauce has heated through add the partially cooked chicken, potatoes and onions and mix in until well coated in the sauce. Bring the pan to a very gentle simmer then place on a lid and cook for 20 minutes or until the chicken is cooked through and the potatoes are soft.
  • Next add the chopped sugar snap peas to the curry and simmer for a further 2 minutes.
    100 g sugar snap peas
  • Find and remove the star anise. Then taste the curry and season to your liking with lime juice and fish sauce.
    ½ a lime juiced, ½ teaspoon Fish sauce
  • Serve and top with freshly sliced red chillies, fresh coriander leaves and chopped cashews nuts.
    Toppings: Fresh coriander

Video

Notes

Chicken: This recipe uses raw chicken. However, cooked shredded chicken can also be used. This means you could buy a rotisserie chicken or use leftover chicken from a previous meal.
Potatoes: Choose a waxy variety that will hold together well such as Charlotte, Anya, baby or new potatoes. Leave the skins on for a more rustic finish and to add more fibre to your meal.
Coconut milk: Coconut milk is the base of most Thai curries. However, if you need a different option the best replacement in terms of consistency and flavour is cream. This can be a little heavy so you could also use yogurt (full fat).
Fish sauce: Fish sauce is the main seasoning ingredient in Thai cooking and completely transforms the dish. I highly recommend using fish sauce in this recipe for the best flavour. If you can't get hold of any or if you are making a vegetarian curry, you can substitute with soy sauce, Worcestershire sauce or seaweed paste.
Chicken massaman curry: The chicken can be replace with your preferred meat or fish (lamb or cod are good options). Or swap in for veggies (courgette, aubergine, sweet potato) if you want to make a vegetarian tikka masala.
Coconut milk: This will have separated in the can so give it a shake and a stir before adding to the pan.
Spicy massaman curry: For an extra kick add in sliced chilli pepper or a few drops of Tabasco or a teaspoon of hot chilli powder.
How to store? Once made, allow the massaman curry to completely cool then transfer to a sealable container and keep in the fridge for 2 days or or in the freezer for up to 3 months. Defrost in the fridge overnight. Reheat in a pan or in the microwave until piping hot throughout.
What to serve with massaman curry? Serve up with a helping of jasmine rice or plain rice, plus extra cashew nuts, fresh chilli and fresh coriander.

Nutrition

Serving: 279g | Calories: 440kcal | Carbohydrates: 20g | Protein: 31g | Fat: 27g | Saturated Fat: 20g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 80mg | Sodium: 223mg | Potassium: 1047mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 1494IU | Vitamin C: 34mg | Calcium: 63mg | Iron: 5mg

This post was first published in Jan 2020. Updated in Oct 2021 with new step by step instructions and expert tips.

The post Massaman Curry appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/massaman-curry/feed/ 0
Chicken Tikka Masala Curry https://properfoodie.com/chicken-tikka-masala-curry/ https://properfoodie.com/chicken-tikka-masala-curry/#comments Sat, 02 Oct 2021 15:01:36 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=2066 A mild and fragrant chicken tikka masala curry made with homemade tikka paste, ground spices and fresh herbs. This easy to make tikka masala curry is perfect for a stay at home curry night and a great dish to whip up for a dinner party. Its also a fantastic recipe for using up your leftover...

Read More

The post Chicken Tikka Masala Curry appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
A mild and fragrant chicken tikka masala curry made with homemade tikka paste, ground spices and fresh herbs. This easy to make tikka masala curry is perfect for a stay at home curry night and a great dish to whip up for a dinner party. Its also a fantastic recipe for using up your leftover or rotisserie chicken.

Chicken tikka masala curry in a bowl with rice.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

A delicious, homemade chicken tikka masala curry that you will find yourself making again and again. After marinating the meat, this lovely curry can be made and on the table within 30 minutes. If you're really short on time you can skip the marinating time. Just mix the chicken into the marinade and add to the curry. However, the flavour of the chicken will be greatly enhanced by marinating for just 20 minutes and then cooking on griddle pan until lightly browned.

🥘 Ingredients

To make chicken tikka curry for 4 people you will need:

Ingredients needed to make this recipe

Ingredient notes

Measurements: For the amounts required, see the recipe card below and use the toggle button to see the recipe in cups.

Passata: Passata is the best option for a making a smooth tomato based curry sauce. Alternatively use a tin of chopped tomatoes but whiz up in the blender.

Chicken: This recipe uses raw chicken. However, cooked shredded chicken can also be used. This means you could buy a rotisserie chicken or use leftover chicken from a previous meal.

Tikka masala paste: This recipe uses a homemade tikka masala paste, but if you are short on time you can buy a jar of paste.

Ground almonds: This adds a sweetness to the curry without having to add sugar. However, if you prefer, the almonds can be replaced with 2 teaspoon of sugar.

Plain yogurt: Use full fat yogurt to help keep the sauce nice and thick. This adds a creaminess to the sauce. If you want extra creamy sauce then replace with 2 tablespoon of double cream.

Fresh garlic and ginger: Fresh garlic and ginger will give the best flavour for this tikka curry, but a teaspoon of paste or jarred garlic/ginger could be used instead.

Tikka masala spices: Paprika, cinnamon, garam masala are used in this recipe which helps boost the flavour already provided by the tikka paste. I recommend using at least these spices and for a little extra flavour try adding a teaspoon of cumin and turmeric.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. First add 2 tablespoon of tikka masala paste and 120ml plain yogurt to a large bowl and mix together well to create a tikka marinade.
  2. Slice the chicken breast into chunks and add to the tikka marinade. Alternatively slice or shred leftover or rotisserie chicken and add to the marinade. Stir well to completely coat the chicken. Cover and leave to marinade in the fridge for around 20 minutes. You can marinade for longer (max 2 hours) but don't over marinade as the chicken may start to become a bit mushy.
  3. Next heat up a tablespoon of oil in a large pan and add finely chopped onion, garlic and ginger. Gently fry until the onions start to caramelise. 
  4. Once the onions are caramelised add the juice of half a lemon, chopped coriander stems, 1 tablespoon of tikka masala paste and the ground spices. Mix together and continue to gently fry on a medium heat allowing the paste and spices to release their flavours.Four images showing how to make chicken tikka masala step by step for steps 1-4.
  5. Stir in the passata and ground almonds and bring to a gentle simmer, then remove from the heat to slightly cool.
  6. Remove the marinated chicken from the fridge. At this point the chicken can either be added as it is directly to the curry sauce or can be griddle in a pan to brown the marinade. To griddle add the marinated chicken to a sizzlingly hot pan (no oil required). Fry until browned on both sides then remove from the pan into a bowl.
  7. Add 2 tablespoon yogurt to the slightly cooled curry sauce and stir in well.
  8. Next add the marinated chicken and fresh coriander leaves to the sauce. The marinated chicken can be browned off in the griddle pan first (step 6) or just added straight from the marinating bowl with all the marinade. Stir together well.Four images showing how to make chicken tikka masala step by step for steps 5-8.
  9. Bring the curry to a gentle simmer to ensure the chicken is cooked through before serving. If you have added raw marinated chicken directly to the curry simmer for 10 minutes or so until the chicken is cooked.

💭 Expert tips

Chicken tikka curry: The chicken can be replace with your preferred meat or fish (lamb or cod are good options). Or swap in for veggies (courgette, aubergine, sweet potato) if you want to make a vegetarian tikka masala.

Spicy tikka curry: For an extra kick add in sliced chilli pepper or a few drops of Tabasco or a teaspoon of hot chilli powder.

❓ Frequently asked questions

How to store?

Once made, allow the tikka masala curry to completely cool then transfer to a sealable container and keep in the fridge for 2 days or or in the freezer for up to 3 months. Defrost in the fridge overnight. Reheat in a pan or in the microwave until piping hot throughout.

What to serve with chicken tikka masala curry?

Serve up with a helping of rice, naan bread, extra coriander leaves and wedges of lemon.

Is there a difference between tikka and tikka masala?

Tikka usually means pieces of marinated meat cooked in a tandoor or grilled. Tikka masala uses the marinated meat in a curry sauce.

Chicken tikka masala curry and rice in a bowl sat on a plate with a gold fork at the side and half a squeezed lemon in the background.

🍛 Other easy homemade curry recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Chicken tikka masala curry in a bowl with rice.
Print

Chicken Tikka Masala Curry

A mild and fragrant chicken tikka masala curry made with homemade tikka paste, ground spices and fresh herbs. This easy to make tikka masala curry is perfect for a stay at home curry night and a great dish to whip up for a dinner party. Also a fantastic recipe for using up leftover or rotisserie chicken.
Course Dinner, evening meal, main meal
Cuisine Indian
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 55 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 328kcal

Equipment

  • Large mixing bowl (to marinade chicken)
  • Griddle pan (optional)

Ingredients

For the chicken marinade

  • 500 g raw chicken breast or leftover/rotisserie chicken
  • 2 tablespoons curry paste homemade or shop bought
  • 120 ml plain yogurt

For the curry

  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 Onion finely chopped
  • 2 garlic cloves finely chopped or minced
  • 2 cm piece of fresh ginger peeled and finely chopped
  • ½ lemon juiced
  • Handful fresh coriander stems chopped
  • 1 tablespoon curry paste homemade or shop bought
  • 2 teaspoons garam masala
  • 1 teaspoon paprika
  • 1 teaspoon cinnamon
  • 400 g passata
  • 40 g ground almonds
  • 2 tablespoons plain yogurt
  • Handful fresh coriander leaves

Instructions

  • First add 2 tablespoon of tikka masala paste and 120ml plain yogurt to a large bowl and mix together well to create a tikka marinade.
    2 tablespoons curry paste, 120 ml plain yogurt
  • Slice the chicken breast into chunks and add to the tikka marinade. Alternatively slice or shred leftover or rotisserie chicken and add to the marinade. Stir well to completely coat the chicken. Cover and leave to marinade in the fridge for around 20 minutes. You can marinade for longer (max 2 hours) but don't over marinade as the chicken may start to become a bit mushy.
    500 g raw chicken breast or leftover/rotisserie chicken
  • Next heat up a tablespoon of oil in a large pan and add finely chopped onion, garlic and ginger. Gently fry until the onions start to caramelise.
    1 Onion, 2 garlic cloves, 2 cm piece of fresh ginger
  • Once the onions are caramelised add the juice of half a lemon, chopped coriander stems, 1 tablespoon of tikka masala paste and the ground spices. Mix together and continue to gently fry on a medium heat allowing the paste and spices to release their flavours.
    ½ lemon juiced, 1 tablespoon curry paste, 2 teaspoons garam masala, 1 teaspoon paprika, 1 teaspoon cinnamon
  • Stir in the passata and ground almonds and bring to a gentle simmer, then remove from the heat to slightly cool.
    400 g passata, 40 g ground almonds
  • Remove the marinated chicken from the fridge. At this point the chicken can either be added as it is directly to the curry sauce or can be griddle in a pan to brown the marinade. To griddle add the marinated chicken to a sizzlingly hot pan (no oil required). Fry until browned on both sides then remove from the pan into a bowl.
  • Add 2 tablespoon yogurt to the slightly cooled curry sauce and stir in well.
    2 tablespoons plain yogurt
  • Next add the marinated chicken and fresh coriander leaves to the sauce. The marinated chicken can be browned off in the griddle pan first (step 6) or just added straight from the marinating bowl with all the marinade. Stir together well.
    Handful fresh coriander leaves
  • Bring the curry to a gentle simmer to ensure the chicken is cooked through before serving. If you have added raw marinated chicken directly to the curry simmer for 10 minutes or so until the chicken is cooked.

Notes

Passata: Passata is the best option for a making a smooth tomato based curry sauce. Alternatively use a tin of chopped tomatoes but whiz up in the blender.
Chicken: This recipe uses raw chicken. However, cooked shredded chicken can also be used. This means you could buy a rotisserie chicken or use leftover chicken from a previous meal.
Tikka masala paste: This recipe uses a homemade tikka masala paste, but if you are short on time you can buy a jar of paste.
Ground almonds: This adds a sweetness to the curry without having to add sugar. However, if you prefer, the almonds can be replaced with 2 teaspoon of sugar.
Plain yogurt: Use full fat yogurt to help keep the sauce nice and thick. This adds a creaminess to the sauce. If you want extra creamy sauce then replace with 2 tablespoon of double cream.
Fresh garlic and ginger: Fresh garlic and ginger will give the best flavour for this tikka curry, but a teaspoon of paste or jarred garlic/ginger could be used instead.
Tikka masala spices: Paprika, cinnamon, garam masala are used in this recipe which helps boost the flavour already provided by the tikka paste. I recommend using at least these spices and for a little extra flavour try adding a teaspoon of cumin and turmeric.
Chicken tikka curry: The chicken can be replace with your preferred meat or fish (lamb or cod are good options). Or swap in for veggies (courgette, aubergine, sweet potato) if you want to make a vegetarian tikka masala.
Spicy tikka curry: For an extra kick add in sliced chilli pepper or a few drops of Tabasco or a teaspoon of hot chilli powder.
How to store?
Once made, allow the tikka masala curry to completely cool then transfer to a sealable container and keep in the fridge for 2 days or or in the freezer for up to 3 months. Defrost in the fridge overnight. Reheat in a pan or in the microwave until piping hot throughout.
What to serve with chicken tikka masala?
Serve up with a helping of rice, naan bread, extra coriander leaves and wedges of lemon.

Nutrition

Calories: 328kcal | Carbohydrates: 19g | Protein: 33g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 85mg | Sodium: 195mg | Potassium: 1047mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 9g | Vitamin A: 2653IU | Vitamin C: 19mg | Calcium: 127mg | Iron: 3mg

This post was first published in Aug 2016. Updated in Sept 2021 with an improved recipe, new photos, and new step by step instructions and expert tips.

The post Chicken Tikka Masala Curry appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/chicken-tikka-masala-curry/feed/ 4
Homemade Tikka Masala Paste https://properfoodie.com/homemade-tikka-masala-paste/ https://properfoodie.com/homemade-tikka-masala-paste/#comments Mon, 27 Sep 2021 15:40:33 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=2059 Homemade tikka masala paste made with ground spices and fresh herbs. This easy to make tikka curry paste is great to have handy in the fridge, ready for your next impromptu curry night. Its fresh and aromatic and whizzed together in just 10 minutes. 👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe I love to make my own...

Read More

The post Homemade Tikka Masala Paste appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Homemade tikka masala paste made with ground spices and fresh herbs. This easy to make tikka curry paste is great to have handy in the fridge, ready for your next impromptu curry night. Its fresh and aromatic and whizzed together in just 10 minutes.

Tikka masala paste in a jar with a teaspoonful of paste hovering above the jar.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

I love to make my own pastes for all my curries, you just can't beat the sweet and spicy aromas of fresh curry paste hitting the surface of a hot pan. Use this tikka masala curry paste recipe to make a chicken marinade for this amazing chicken tikka masala curry.

Theres also a whole world of pastes to explore once you've mastered making this one (see links below)! I also love to make my own biryani masala marinade for a tasty homemade fish biryani.

🥘 Ingredients

To make a small jar of tikka masala curry paste you will need:

tikka masala paste ingredients.

Ingredient notes

Measurements: For the amounts required, see the recipe card below and use the toggle button to see the recipe in cups.

Fresh ginger: Use fresh ginger if you can get hold of it. If not, a teaspoon of ginger paste, jarred ginger or ground ginger will work just fine.

Fresh garlic: Fresh garlic cloves will give the best flavour for this tikka paste, but a teaspoon of jarred or granulated garlic could be used instead.

Red chilli pepper: The chillies used here will ultimately determine how hot your curry is. So if you like it spicy then use hotter chillies. Use the smaller, thinner finger chillies for extra heat or use the larger red chillies for a milder flavour. If you would prefer no spice at all then just replace the chillies with red bell pepper (capsicum).

Coriander: Coriander is a great flavour in tikka masala paste and so I don't recommend that you substitute or leave it out. This recipe uses both fresh and ground coriander for full flavour and a burst of colour.

Tikka masala spices: Cumin, garam masala and paprika are used in this recipe as the base for this tikka paste. I recommend using at least these spices and for a little extra flavour try adding a teaspoon of cinnamon and turmeric.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Place all the ingredients into a small blender.
  2. Add just 1 tablespoon of oil to begin with, more can be added as required.
  3. Start the blender and blend until the ingredients start to come together into a paste.
  4. If the blender has trouble getting going add another half tablespoon of oil of tomato puree. then after this add small amounts of tap water in between blending, until you are happy with the consistency.Step by step images of how to make tikka curry paste
  5. Once completely blended the paste can be used immediately as a marinade. Mix 2 tablespoons of the tikka masala paste with 120ml of plain yogurt. Then cover raw or leftover cooked chicken with the marinade and leave in the fridge for at least 2 hours. Alternatively you can jar up the paste and keep in the fridge for up to a month.

💭 Expert tips

Scaling this recipe: The ingredients for this recipe will make around 6 tablespoons of tikka paste (one small 110ml jar). To make more just increase the amounts of ingredients.

Consistency of the tikka paste: Make sure to only add small amount of water in between blending (½ a tablespoon at a time) otherwise your paste will be too thin.

Spicy tikka paste: For an extra kick add a few drops of Tabasco or a teaspoon of hot chilli powder.

❓ Frequently asked questions

How to store?

Once made, tikka masala paste can be transferred to a jar and kept in the fridge for up to a month or in the freezer for up to 3 months.

How to use tikka masala paste?

I like to mix this tikka paste with plain yogurt to create a beautiful marinade for sliced chicken breasts. The marinaded chicken can then be used in this tasty chicken tikka masala curry. But of course you could use any meat or fish. Also use as a marinade for vegetables to make a vegetarian curry. Or if you don't have time to make a paste, check out my quick chicken and almond curry.

Can you buy tikka masala paste?

If you prefer you can just buy a jar of paste from the supermarket. Sometimes a jar of paste and a packet of microwave rice are just the ticket on a busy weekday night. That said, if I have the time and where-with-all to get out my blender and chop up a few ingredients, then I most certainly will. Not only does homemade curry paste taste amazing but the fragrant aromas that fill the kitchen are just too good to miss.

Is there a difference between tikka and tikka masala?

Tikka usually means pieces of marinated meat cooked in a tandoor or grilled. Tikka masala uses the marinated meat in a curry sauce.

Tikka curry paste in a small jar.

🍛 Other easy homemade curry pastes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Tikka curry paste in a small jar.
Print

Homemade Tikka Masala Paste

Homemade tikka masala paste made with ground spices and fresh herbs. This easy to make tikka curry paste is great to have handy in the fridge, ready for your next impromptu curry night. Its fresh and aromatic and whizzed together in just 10 minutes.
Course paste
Cuisine Indian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 6 tablespoons
Calories 33kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 garlic cloves roughly chopped

  • 1 red chilli pepper seeds removed and roughly chopped

  • 2 cm piece of fresh ginger peeled and minced
  • 2 teaspoon garam masala
  • 1 teaspoon hot paprika or paprika
  • 1 teaspoon ground coriander
  • ½ teaspoon cumin seeds or ground cumin
  • 1 tablespoon oil
  • 1 tablespoon tomato puree
  • 30 g fresh coriander chopped including stems

  • Pinch of sea salt

Instructions

  • Place all the ingredients into a small blender.
    2 garlic cloves, 1 red chilli pepper, 2 cm piece of fresh ginger, 2 teaspoon garam masala, 1 teaspoon hot paprika, 1 teaspoon ground coriander, ½ teaspoon cumin seeds, 1 tablespoon tomato puree, 30 g fresh coriander, Pinch of sea salt
  • Add just 1 tablespoon of oil to begin with, more can be added as required.
    1 tablespoon oil
  • Start the blender and blend until the ingredients start to come together into a paste.
  • If the blender has trouble getting going add another half tablespoon of oil of tomato puree. Then after this add small amounts of tap water in between blending, until you are happy with the consistency.
  • Once completely blended the paste can be used immediately as a marinade. Mix 2 tablespoons of the tikka masala paste with 120ml of plain yogurt. Then cover raw or leftover cooked chicken with the marinade and leave in the fridge for at least 2 hours. Alternatively you can jar up the paste and keep in the fridge for up to a month.

Video

Notes

Scaling this recipe: The ingredients for this recipe will make around 6 tablespoons of tikka paste (one small 110ml jar). To make more just increase the amounts of ingredients.
Consistency of the tikka paste: Make sure to only add small amount of water in between blending (½ a tablespoon at a time) otherwise your paste will be too thin.
Spicy tikka paste: For an extra kick add a few drops of Tabasco or a teaspoon of hot chilli powder.
How to store? Once made, tikka masala paste can be transferred to a jar and kept in the fridge for up to a month or in the freezer for up to 3 months.
How to use tikka masala paste? I like to mix this tikka paste with plain yogurt to create a beautiful marinade for sliced chicken breasts. The marinaded chicken can then be used in this tasty chicken tikka masala curry. But of course you could use any meat or fish. Also use as a marinade for vegetables to make a vegetarian curry. Or if you don't have time to make a paste, check out my quick chicken and almond curry.
Can you buy tikka masala paste? If you prefer you can just buy a jar of paste from the supermarket. Sometimes a jar of paste and a packet of microwave rice are just the ticket on a busy weekday night. That said, if I have the time and where-with-all to get out my blender and chop up a few ingredients, then I most certainly will. Not only does homemade curry paste taste amazing but the fragrant aromas that fill the kitchen are just too good to miss.
Is there a difference between tikka and tikka masala? Tikka usually means pieces of marinated meat cooked in a tandoor or grilled. Tikka masala uses the marinated meat in a curry sauce.

Nutrition

Serving: 1tablespoon | Calories: 33kcal | Carbohydrates: 2g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 3g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 1g | Sodium: 69mg | Potassium: 82mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 589IU | Vitamin C: 13mg | Calcium: 11mg | Iron: 1mg

This post was first published in Aug 2016. Updated in Sept 2021 with an improved photos, and new step by step instructions and expert tips.

 

The post Homemade Tikka Masala Paste appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/homemade-tikka-masala-paste/feed/ 27
Leek and Potato Soup https://properfoodie.com/leek-and-potato-soup/ https://properfoodie.com/leek-and-potato-soup/#respond Fri, 24 Jan 2020 16:18:55 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=12133 Leek and potato soup or vichyssoise soup is a classic dish that is really easy to make in just 30 minutes. This comforting soup is great for using up leftovers, has an amazing full on flavour and as a bonus its super healthy as its packed full of nutrients. Made with everyday ingredients, its affordable,...

Read More

The post Leek and Potato Soup appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Leek and potato soup or vichyssoise soup is a classic dish that is really easy to make in just 30 minutes. This comforting soup is great for using up leftovers, has an amazing full on flavour and as a bonus its super healthy as its packed full of nutrients. Made with everyday ingredients, its affordable, tasty and a great recipe for batch cooking and stocking up the freezer.

A bowl of leek and potato soup topped with a swirl of cream and chopped chives.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

Not only is leek and potato soup tasty and comforting but its also a really nutritious recipe and perfect for refuelling on a cold day. Potatoes are a starchy carbohydrate and a great source of calcium, Iron and B vitamins. With the skins on, potatoes also provide a good source of fibre. So to boost the fibre and the texture of this recipe, give your tatties a good wash and leave the skins on!

This warming, full flavoured, healthy potato soup also contains 1 portion of your 5 a day, from the onions, celery and leeks. Plus, each serving of soup comes in at under 300kcal, meaning that theres plenty of room left for a nice chunk of crusty bread on the side. For a soup without potatoes that still contains plenty of nutrients try my rustic, traditional Tuscan ribollita soup

🥘 Ingredients

To make a pot of this delicious leek and potato soup, to serve 4 people, you will need:

  • Butter
  • 1 Onion finely chopped 
  • 2 celery sticks chopped 
  • 2 medium leeks chopped 
  • 3 large potatoes peeled and cubed
  • Vegetable stock 
  • Pinch of salt
  • 2 tablespoon double cream (optional)
  • Chopped chives and extra cream to serve (optional)

Ingredient notes

Measurements: For the amounts required, see the recipe card below and use the toggle button to see the recipe in cups.

Butter: Use butter for a richer flavour, but if you prefer you can substitute with a tablespoon of oil.

Leeks: The best part of the leek to use for soup is the white and light green parts. The darker green parts toward the top of the plant tend to be a bit tough and fibrous - not great if your wanting to make a soup! before chopping leeks make sure the insides are clean. To do this slice the leek in half length ways to reveal all the layers inside. Then carefully run each half under the cold water tap to wash aways any bits of dirt caught between the layers. 

Potatoes: For a creamy soup opt for a fluffy potato such as Maris Piper or King Edward. If you want a chunky soup then use waxy potatoes (Charlotte), which will hold together better. 

Celery: Celery adds a wonderful flavour alongside the onion, however, the soup won't be ruined of you prefer not to add celery.

Vegetable stock: Use good quality vegetable stock.

Double cream and chives: these are a serving suggestion and completely optional. If you decide to use the cream, add a bit at a time and taste until you are happy.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Place a large pan on a medium heat and melt 30g of butter. Add the chopped onions and celery and gently fry until the onions are soft.
  2. Add the chopped leeks and potatoes to the pan and stir in well.
  3. Next pour in the vegetable stock and bring to a gentle simmer
  4. Place on a lid and simmer for 20 minutes or until the potatoes are soft.Step by step images of how to make leek and potato soup steps 1-4.
  5. When the potatoes are fully cooked, thoroughly blend the soup until smooth. Do this by either transferring the soup to a blender or use a hand blender directly in the pan. If you would prefer a chunky soup then only blend half and then mix with the unblended half. 
  6. Have extra water ready to add if you want to thin the consistency of your soup. I usually thin mine down to the point where it lightly coats the back of a spoon. When you're happy with the consistency, taste the soup and add salt if needed.
  7. For extra creamy soup stir in 2 tablespoon of double cream (optional).
  8. Serve the soup in bowls and if you like top with extra cream and chopped chives.Step by step images of how to make leek and potato soup steps 5-8.

❓ Frequently asked questions

How do you make a chunky leek and potato soup?

To make a chunky soup instead of smooth, only blend half of the soup and then mix back into the unblended half.

How do you make potato soup thicker?

As potatoes are starchy its usual for this type of soup to be too thick rather than too thin. The addition of extra stock or water will help to thin it out. However, if you add too much water you may end up with soup that is too thin. To avoid this add any extra water or stock a bit at a time and stir in well before adding more.
If your soup is too thin you can thicken it back up by gently heating and gradually reducing down.

How to store?

Leek and potato soup will keep well in the fridge for up to 3 days. If you are adding cream, check that this has a good date on it and will keep for the 3 days. Alternatively only add the cream when you are ready to eat the soup. Alternatively freeze for up to 3 months. Defrost thoroughly before reheating. As potatoes are super starchy make sure you stir the soup continually during reheating or the potato may stick to the bottom of the pan and burn.

What to serve with leek and potato soup?

Leek and potato soup is best served up with a crunchy piece of buttered bread or soft, white homemade bread rolls.

What is Vichyssoise?

The french name for leek and potato soup is Vichyssoise soup. Vichyssoise is slightly different to this recipe as its usually a fully blended soup thats served cold. 

A bowl of homemade leek and potato soup with a second bowl of soup in the background.

🥔 How can I get more potatoes into my diet?

Potatoes are so versatile and they are great served up with most things.  Like roast potatoes or mashed potatoes with your roast chicken or roast beef dinner on a Sunday. Or if you just want an easy side to go with your mid week meals try these garlic, herb foil pack potatoes. Other potato soups that are just as satisfying as leek and potato on a cold day are celeriac and potato soup or creamy clam chowder.  Or for a meal thats a little more substantial why not try my super affordable Frozen Salmon and potato traybake? Or salmon and mackerel fishcakes.

If you want something a little more indulgent then add potatoes to a pie: fish pie, minted lamb pie, cottage pie or shepherds pie. 

🍵 Other soup recipes you might like:

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

A bowl of leek and potato soup topped with a swirl of cream and chopped chives.
Print

Leek and potato soup

Leek and potato soup or vichyssoise soup is a classic dish that is really easy to make in just 30 minutes. This comforting soup is great for using up leftovers, has an amazing full on flavour and as a bonus its super healthy as its packed full of nutrients. Made with everyday ingredients, its affordable, tasty and a great recipe for batch cooking and stocking up the freezer.
Course main meal, starter, starter or main
Cuisine British, French
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 248kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 30 g Butter
  • 1 Onion finely chopped 125g
  • 2 celery sticks chopped 100g
  • 2 medium leeks chopped 200
  • 3 large potatoes peeled and cubed 600g
  • 500 ml vegetable stock Plus extra water if required
  • Pinch of salt
  • 2 tablespoon double cream Optional
  • Chopped chives and extra cream to serve Optional

Instructions

  • Place a large pan on a medium heat and melt 30g of butter. Add the chopped onions and celery and gently fry until the onions are soft.
    30 g Butter, 1 Onion finely chopped, 2 celery sticks chopped
  • Add the chopped leeks and potatoes to the pan and stir in well.
    2 medium leeks chopped, 3 large potatoes peeled and cubed
  • Next pour in the vegetable stock and bring to a gentle simmer
    500 ml vegetable stock
  • Place on a lid and simmer for 20 minutes or until the potatoes are soft.
  • When the potatoes are fully cooked, thoroughly blend the soup until smooth. Do this by either transferring the soup to a blender or use a hand blender directly in the pan. If you would prefer a chunky soup then only blend half and then mix with the unblended half.
  • Have extra water ready to add if you want to thin the consistency of your soup. I usually thin mine down to the point where it lightly coats the back of a spoon. When you're happy with the consistency, taste the soup and add salt if needed.
    Pinch of salt
  • For extra creamy soup stir in 2 tablespoon of double cream (optional).
    2 tablespoon double cream
  • Serve the soup in bowls and if you like top with extra cream and chopped chives.
    Chopped chives and extra cream to serve

Video

Notes

Butter: Use butter for a richer flavour, but if you prefer you can substitute with a tablespoon of oil.
Leeks: The best part of the leek to use for soup is the white and light green parts. The darker green parts toward the top of the plant tend to be a bit tough and fibrous - not great if your wanting to make a soup! before chopping leeks make sure the insides are clean. To do this slice the leek in half length ways to reveal all the layers inside. Then carefully run each half under the cold water tap to wash aways any bits of dirt caught between the layers. 
Potatoes: For a creamy soup opt for a fluffy potato such as Maris Piper or King Edward. If you want a chunky soup then use waxy potatoes (Charlotte), which will hold together better. 
Celery: Celery adds a wonderful flavour alongside the onion, however, the soup won't be ruined of you prefer not to add celery. Vegetable stock: Use good quality vegetable stock.
Double cream and chives: these are a serving suggestion and completely optional. If you decide to use the cream, add a bit at a time and taste until you are happy.
How do you make a chunky leek and potato soup? To make a chunky soup instead of smooth, only blend half of the soup and then mix back into the unblended half.
How do you make potato soup thicker? As potatoes are starchy its usual for this type of soup to be too thick rather than too thin. The addition of extra stock or water will help to thin it out. However, if you add too much water you may end up with soup that is too thin. To avoid this add any extra water or stock a bit at a time and stir in well before adding more. 
If your soup is too thin you can thicken it back up by gently heating and gradually reducing down.
How to store? Leek and potato soup will keep well in the fridge for up to 3 days. If you are adding cream, check that this has a good date on it and will keep for the 3 days. Alternatively only add the cream when you are ready to eat the soup. Alternatively freeze for up to 3 months. Defrost thoroughly before reheating. As potatoes are super starchy make sure you stir the soup continually during reheating or the potato may stick to the bottom of the pan and burn.
What to serve with leek and potato soup? Leek and potato soup is best served up with a crunchy piece of buttered bread or soft, white homemade bread rolls.
What is Vichyssoise? The french name for leek and potato soup is Vichyssoise soup. Vichyssoise is slightly different to this recipe as its usually a fully blended soup thats served cold. 

Nutrition

Serving: 350ml | Calories: 248kcal | Carbohydrates: 39g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 9g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 26mg | Sodium: 645mg | Potassium: 840mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 1513IU | Vitamin C: 39mg | Calcium: 71mg | Iron: 2mg

This post was first published in Jan 2020. Updated in Sept 2021 with improved photos, and new step by step instructions and expert tips.

The post Leek and Potato Soup appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/leek-and-potato-soup/feed/ 0
Mexican Chilli Con Carne (with cannellini beans) https://properfoodie.com/smokey-chilli-con-carne-cannellini/ https://properfoodie.com/smokey-chilli-con-carne-cannellini/#comments Fri, 16 Jun 2017 18:44:29 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=4243 This Mexican Chilli con carne recipe uses smoked paprika, ground cumin, chilli powder and tomatoes for the base of the sauce. These ingredients are combined and left to simmer gently for few hours reducing down and infusing to create a wonderfully rich and smokey sauce. 👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe When it comes to easy...

Read More

The post Mexican Chilli Con Carne (with cannellini beans) appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
This Mexican Chilli con carne recipe uses smoked paprika, ground cumin, chilli powder and tomatoes for the base of the sauce. These ingredients are combined and left to simmer gently for few hours reducing down and infusing to create a wonderfully rich and smokey sauce.

chilli con carne in half a bowl with rice in the other half and a second bowl of chilli in the background.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

When it comes to easy weeknight recipes, chilli con carne has to be in the running. Its so quick to prepare and most of the ingredients are store cupboard or fridge basics. Once prepared, Mexican chilli con carne always benefits from a long, slow cook, either in the oven or slow cooker. The longer you leave it the thicker and more flavoursome the chilli. The kidney beans have been swapped for cannellini beans and the chilli is made extra rich and fragrant by the addition of cocoa powder and smoked paprika.

🥘 Ingredients

To make Mexican chilli con carne at home you will need:

ingredients to make chilli con carne

Ingredient notes

Measurements: For the amounts required, see the recipe card below and use the toggle button to see the recipe in cups.

Cannellini beans: cannellini beans have a soft texture and a light colour. But these can be replaced with the usual kidney bean if you prefer.

Bell pepper and celery: The bell pepper and celery are used in this recipe to add extra flavour and a more chunky texture, but again if you prefer you can leave these out.

Cocoa powder and Worcestershire sauce: To make this dish extra special I use Cocoa powder and Worcestershire sauce as my 'secret chilli ingredients'. Both add a rich flavour to the sauce which cuts through the sweet tomatoes and smokey spices. However, both of these are optional and if you prefer you can just leave them out.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Pre heat oven to 160°C/320°F. Add ½ tablespoon olive oil, 1 finely chopped onion, minced garlic cloves and 2 roughly chopped celery sticks to a large pan and stir fry. Then add the mince meat to the pan and roughly break up with a wooden spoon. 
  2. As the meat starts to cook add 1 teaspoon smoked paprika, 1 teaspoon ground cumin, 1 teaspoon hot chilli powder and 1 finely chopped red chilli pepper.
  3. Next add 2 tins of chopped tomatoes, 200g sliced baby tomatoes, 2 tablespoon tomato puree and 1 beef stock cube dissolved in a small amount of boiling water. Stir well then bring to a simmer.
  4. Add the chopped red bell pepper, 1 tablespoon cocoa powder, 2 tablespoon Worcestershire sauce and 1 tin of cannellini beans. Mix together well and then cover with a lid or tin foil.step by step images of how to make chilli con carne steps 1-4.
  5. Place in the centre of a preheated oven and cook at 160°C/320°F for 2 hours. Check and stir half way through. Alternatively transfer to a slow cooker and cook on medium for 6-7 hours.
  6. Once cooked remove from the oven. Stir through some freshly chopped coriander and serve in bowls with rice, fresh chillies and soured cream.Images of how to make chilli con carne for recipe steps 5 and 6

💭 Expert tips

  • Use 2 chilli peppers or 2 teaspoon of hot chilli powder if you like your chilli super spicy
  • Instead of dissolving the stock cube in boiling water, try crumbling directly into the chilli so as not to water down the dish.
  • If you are short on time you can simmer the chilli on the stove for an hour or so instead of in the oven or slow cooker. However, for best results always cook in the oven.

❓ Frequently asked questions

How to store?

Once cooked allow to fully cool then transfer to sealable containers and refrigerate for up to 3 days or freeze for up 3 months. To defrost leave on the side overnight or in the fridge for 24 hours

Can cook chilli con carne in the slow cooker?

This chilli is best when loaded into an ovenproof dish and then slow cooked in the oven for a few hours. However, it can also be cooked in the slow cooker and this is a great option if you are out all day. Cook on medium in the slow cooker for 6-7 hours.

What to serve with chilli con carne?

The simplest is a nice helping of boiled rice, which can be made a little more interesting by stirring through some freshly chopped coriander and parsley. Being Mexican, Chilli con carne is also fantastic when served with tortilla chips, avocado, guacamole, soured cream, grated cheese and fresh coriander.

Why add cocoa to chilli?

Cocoa powder seems like an odd addition to a savoury dish. However, don't be put off as it really does make this dish extra special. The bitter flavour of the dark chocolate powder cuts through the sweet tang from the tomatoes and balances out the fiery heat from the chillies. You will also note that the cocoa helps to smooth out the chilli as it melts into the sauce - well worth a try!

chilli con carne in a bowl with rice, green chillies, soured cream and fresh coriander

🌯 Other Mexican recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

chilli con carne in a bowl with cannellini beans and rice.
Print

Mexican Chilli Con Carne Recipe (with cannellini beans)

This Mexican Chilli con carne recipe uses smoked paprika, ground cumin, chilli powder and tomatoes for the base of the sauce. These ingredients are combined and left to simmer gently for few hours reducing down and infusing to create a wonderfully rich and smokey sauce.
Course Dinner, Main Course
Cuisine Mexican
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 2 hours
Total Time 2 hours 30 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 492kcal

Ingredients

  • ½ tablespoon Olive oil
  • 1 Onion finely chopped (200g)
  • 2 Garlic cloves finely chopped or minced
  • 2 celery sticks roughly chopped (120g)
  • 500 g mince meat ground meat
  • 1 teaspoon Smoked paprika
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 teaspoon Hot chilli powder
  • 1 red chilli pepper deseeded and finely chopped (20g)
  • 2 tins chopped tomatoes
  • 200 g baby tomatoes halved
  • 2 tablespoon tomato puree
  • 1 beef stock cube
  • 1 red bell pepper deseeded and diced (130g)
  • 1 tablespoon Cocoa powder optional
  • 2 tablespoon Worcestershire sauce Lea and Perins (optional)
  • 1 tin of cannellini beans drained and rinsed
  • Handful of fresh coriander
  • Soured cream and extra sliced chillies to serve

Instructions

  • Pre heat oven to 160°C/320°F. Place a large wok or frying pan on medium heat. Add the olive oil, onion, minced garlic cloves and 2 roughly chopped celery sticks. Stir fry until the onions and celery are soft.
    ½ tablespoon Olive oil, 1 Onion, 2 Garlic cloves, 2 celery sticks
  • Next add the mince meat to the pan and roughly break up with a wooden spoon.
    500 g mince meat
  • As the meat starts to cook add smoked paprika, ground cumin, hot chilli powder and 1 finely chopped red chilli pepper.
    1 teaspoon Smoked paprika, 1 teaspoon ground cumin, 1 teaspoon Hot chilli powder, 1 red chilli pepper
  • Stir the spices into the meat and continue to cook until brown all over.
  • Next add the tinned tomatoes, baby tomatoes, tomato puree and 1 beef stock cube dissolved in a small amount of boiling water.
    2 tins chopped tomatoes, 200 g baby tomatoes, 2 tablespoon tomato puree, 1 beef stock cube
  • Stir well to combine all the ingredients then bring to a simmer and allow to cook gently for 5 minutes.
  • Then add the chopped red bell pepper, 1 tablespoon cocoa powder, and 2 tablespoon Worcestershire sauce.
    1 red bell pepper, 1 tablespoon Cocoa powder, 2 tablespoon Worcestershire sauce
  • Next add 1 tin of cannellini beans, drained and rinsed. Mix together well and then cover with a lid or tin foil.
    1 tin of cannellini beans
  • Place in the centre of a preheated oven and cook at 160°C/320°F for 2 hours. Check and stir half way through. Alternatively transfer to a slow cooker and cook on medium for 6-7 hours.
  • Once cooked remove from the oven. Stir through some freshly chopped coriander and serve in bowls with rice, fresh chillies and soured cream.
    Handful of fresh coriander, Soured cream and extra sliced chillies to serve

Video

Notes

Serving suggestions: Rice, fresh chillies, tobacco sauce, tortilla chips, avocado, guacamole, soured cream, grated cheese and fresh coriander.
Can you freeze this recipe? Once cooked allow to fully cool then transfer to sealable containers and freeze for up 3 months. To defrost leave on the side overnight or in the fridge for 24 hours.
Can you reheat cooked chilli? If the chilli has been cooled and then stored correctly (freezer for up to 3 months or fridge for up to 3 days) then it can be reheated. Reheat in the microwave or in a large pan on the stove until piping hot.
What can I use instead of kidney beans? Usually kidney beans are added to chilli - however, any bean will do. In this recipe I’ve used cannellini beans as I prefer the texture and colour.
Expert tips:
  • Use 2 chilli peppers or 2 teaspoon of hot chilli powder if you like your chilli super spicy
  • Instead of dissolving the stock cube in boiling water, try crumbling directly into the chilli so as not to water down the dish.
  • If you are short on time you can simmer the chilli on the stove for an hour or so instead of in the oven or slow cooker. However, for best results always cook in the oven.

Nutrition

Serving: 584g | Calories: 492kcal | Carbohydrates: 114g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 3g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 1mg | Sodium: 1170mg | Potassium: 427mg | Fiber: 9g | Sugar: 90g | Vitamin A: 1914IU | Vitamin C: 66mg | Calcium: 75mg | Iron: 3mg

This post was first published in Jun 2017. Updated in Aug 2021 with an improved recipe and photos, and new step by step instructions and expert tips.

The post Mexican Chilli Con Carne (with cannellini beans) appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/smokey-chilli-con-carne-cannellini/feed/ 8
Thai Green Curry Recipe https://properfoodie.com/thai-green-curry/ https://properfoodie.com/thai-green-curry/#comments Sat, 27 Mar 2021 00:20:17 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=6663 A fragrant and creamy Thai green curry recipe with tender chunks of chicken and crunchy green vegetables. Make your own Thai green chicken curry at home with this simple recipe and this easy to make Thai green curry paste. Better than a takeaway any night of the week. [feast_advanced_jump_to] 👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe A...

Read More

The post Thai Green Curry Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>

A fragrant and creamy Thai green curry recipe with tender chunks of chicken and crunchy green vegetables. Make your own Thai green chicken curry at home with this simple recipe and this easy to make Thai green curry paste. Better than a takeaway any night of the week.

A bowl of Thai green chicken curry with mangetout, green coconut sauce and topped with sliced green chillies and crispy onions.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

A creamy and aromatic curry recipe that can be on the table in 30 minutes. Perfectly tender chicken coated in coconut curry sauce and finished with fiery chillies and crispy onions. Simple and delicious.

Thai green curry is also great on a week night when you want something quick and tasty, that doesn't take too much effort. This particular recipe is a Thai chicken curry but feel free to replace the meat with your preferred choice or with extra vegetables.

This Thai green chicken curry recipe is adapted from the Thai recipes I made in 2012 in Thailand when attending the Siam Rice cookery school in Chang Mai, Northern Thailand. I've closely match ingredients where I can and used pre ground spices.

🥘 Ingredients

To make this easy Thai green curry recipe you will need:

Ingredients needed to make Thai green curry.

Ingredient notes

Coconut milk: The best replacement for coconut milk in terms of consistency and flavour is cream. This can be a little heavy so you can also use yogurt or milk. If using milk I would recommend adding flour as well, as described in the recipe, to help keep the sauce thick.

Fish sauce: Fish sauce is the main seasoning ingredient in Thai cooking and completely transforms the dish. I highly recommend using fish sauce in this recipe for the best flavour. If you can't get hold of any or if you are making a vegetarian curry, you can substitute with soy sauce, Worcestershire sauce or seaweed paste.

Chicken: The chicken can be substitute for your preferred meat or fish. Or try a Thai green prawn curry. For a vegetarian option replace the chicken with extra veggies and remember to replace the fish sauce with either soy sauce, Worcestershire sauce or seaweed paste.

Thai green curry paste: For best results I recommend making the Thai green curry paste yourself. However, if you don't have time to make the paste the best alternative is to buy a jar of pre-made paste. Bear in mind that the homemade paste can be made in advance and kept in the fridge for up to a week or frozen for up to 3 months.

Mangetout: I love the crisp and fresh flavour of mangetout in this creamy Thai curry. However, this can be substituted for your preferred veg. Try with tenderstem broccoli, pak choi, baby corn, red onion, finely chopped carrot, aubergine, courgette or green beans.

Flour: The flour is used in this recipe as a thickening agent. If you prefer a Thai green sauce with a thin consistency or if you are making a gluten free version then leave this out. See expert tips below for alternative ways to thicken a curry sauce.

Chillies: The chillies are used as a topping to the curry and will add extra heat to the dish. Taste the chillies first so you have a rough idea of how much heat you're adding. The curry paste already contains chillies so if you're not a fan of too much heat then don't go crazy with the extra chillies. Use the smaller, thinner finger chillies for extra heat or use the larger green chillies for a milder flavour. I like to use red chillies just for the contrasting colours on the top.

Coriander, basil and onions: This are all suggested toppings and are optional.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Place a wok or large shallow pan onto a medium heat. Add 3 tablespoon of Thai green curry paste and cook for 1 minute to release the flavours.
  2. Next add a can a coconut milk and stir well until fully combined with the paste.
  3. Continue to stir until heated through.
  4. Next add a small amount of cold water to 1 tablespoon of plain flour and mix into a paste. Add this to the sauce and stir in. Continue to heat and stir until sauce starts to thicken. (Skip this step if gluten free and see expert tips below for other ways to thicken the sauce)Collage of 4 images showing step by step how to make this this recipe for steps 1-4.
  5. Add the raw, cubed chicken to the green sauce and bring to a gentle simmer. TIP: do not boil as this will cause the sauce to thin out.
  6. Season with lime juice, lime zest, brown sugar and fish sauce (if you're making a vegetarian curry replace the fish sauce with a vegan fish sauce or seaweed paste). Stir well and cook at a simmer for 2-3 minutes or until chicken is cooked through.
  7. Next, add your choice of vegetables (I added mangetout) and heat for a further 1-2 minutes or until veg is cooked but still crisp and bright green.
  8. Top with fresh basil, coriander, fresh chillies and Crispy onions. Dish up and serve with rice.Collage of 4 images showing step by step how to make this this recipe for steps 5-8.

💭 Expert tips

Extra spiciness: If you like your Thai green curry spicy then add chopped, fresh green chillies during cooking.

How to make curry sauce thicker: Use full fat coconut milk in the recipe. The reduced fat versions are more watery and so will ultimately thin out the sauce. Coconut milk can also lose its consistency when boiled rapidly over a prolonged period. So even though reducing a sauce does thicken it, rapidly boiling in this instance will not help. When making this recipe, ensure that the the finished Thai green curry is heated gently until just boiling before serving. 

Other options for thickening the Thai green curry sauce include:

  1. Add full fat yogurt, but be aware that this will reduce the spiciness of the dish, so you may need to add more chillies at the same time. Only add yogurt right at the end of cooking - too much heat and the yogurt will curdle. Take the Thai green curry off the heat and stir in enough yogurt to reach your desired consistency.
  2. Instead of serving rice at the side, mix it directly into your curry whilst still in the pan. Then serve.
  3. If adding vegetables that release water during cooking (e.g. courgettes, mushrooms) roast these in the oven first and then mix into the finished curry.
  4. Add flour to the curry. To avoid flour lumps forming I usually mix 1 tablespoon of flour with a bit of water to form a paste. Then add the flour paste to the curry and mix well. For best results add the flour paste before its heated up to much. Then stir continually until the sauce thickens and the flour is 'cooked out'.

❓ Frequently asked questions

Is this Thai curry hot?

Out of all the Thai currys, Thai green curry is the hottest, despite the belief that Thai red curry is the hotter of the two. This is mainly down to the chillies used in the paste. Green chillies (particularly green birds eye chilli peppers) tend to be hotter than red. So whether the paste is hot or too spicy for you, is dependent on the ingredients used and the amounts. Try the paste before adding and if necessary balance out with yogurt or cream. If a milder curry is much more your thing then try Panang curry, or Massaman curry.

What is the difference between Thai red and Thai green curry?

The main difference between Thai green and Thai red curry is the colour and the heat, both of which come from the type of paste used (Thai red curry paste or Thai green curry paste). Substituting one paste for other will ultimately dictate the type of curry you end up making.

How much curry paste is needed to make a curry?

2-3 tablespoon of paste is usually enough when making a curry for 2-4 people.

How to store?

Once made, allow the Thai green curry to completely cool then transfer to a sealable container and keep in the fridge for 2 days or or in the freezer for up to 3 months. Defrost in the fridge overnight. Reheat in a pan or in the microwave until piping hot throughout.

Is this recipe gluten free?

Yes its gluten free, as long as you don't use the above flour option for thickening. But do always check the packets of the individual ingredients you are using. Generally the main ingredients in this curry are naturally gluten free.

Thai green curry recipe in a large pan topped with sliced red chillies, basil leaves, coriander leaves and crispy onions

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

A bowl of Thai green chicken curry with mangetout, green coconut sauce and topped with sliced green chillies and crispy onions.
Print

Thai Green Curry Recipe

A fragrant and creamy Thai green curry recipe with tender chunks of chicken and crunchy green vegetables. Make your own Thai green chicken curry at home with this simple recipe and this easy to make Thai green curry paste. Better than a takeaway any night of the week.
Course Dinner, Main Course, main meal
Cuisine Thai, Thailand
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 2 people
Calories 763kcal

Equipment

  • Wok or large shallow pan

Ingredients

  • 3 tablespoon of homemade Thai green paste or shop bought green paste if you’re short on time
  • 400 ml can of full fat coconut milk
  • 1 tablespoon plain flour for thickening - optional (do not use if making a gluten free version)
  • 500 g Chicken breast chopped into bitesize cubes
  • Juice and zest of half a lime
  • 2 teaspoon soft brown sugar
  • Few splashes of fish sauce
  • 125 g Mangetout
  • Basil leaves fresh coriander, fresh chillies and crispy onions to serve (optional)
  • Rice to serve optional

Instructions

  • Place a wok or large shallow pan onto a medium heat. Add 3 tablespoon of Thai green curry paste and cook for 1 minute to release the flavours.
  • Next add a can a coconut milk and stir well until fully combined with the paste.
  • Continue to stir until heated through.
  • Next add a small amount of cold water to 1 tablespoon of plain flour and mix into a paste. Add this to the sauce and stir in. Continue to heat and stir until sauce starts to thicken. (Skip this step if making a gluten free version and see expert tips below for other ways to thicken the sauce).
  • Add the raw, cubed chicken to the green sauce and bring to a gentle simmer. TIP: do not boil as this will cause the sauce to thin out.
  • Season with lime juice, lime zest, brown sugar and fish sauce (if you're making a vegetarian curry replace the fish sauce with a vegan fish sauce or seaweed paste). Stir well and cook at a simmer for 2-3 minutes or until chicken is cooked through.
  • Next, add your choice of vegetables (I added mangetout) and heat for a further 1-2 minutes or until veg is cooked but still crisp and bright green.
  • Top with fresh basil, coriander, fresh chillies and Crispy onions. Dish up and serve with rice.

Video

Notes

Coconut milk: The best replacement for coconut milk in terms of consistency and flavour is cream. This can be a little heavy so you can also use yogurt or milk. If using milk I would recommend adding flour as well, as described in the recipe, to help keep the sauce thick.
Fish sauce: Fish sauce is the main seasoning ingredient in Thai cooking and completely transforms the dish. I highly recommend using fish sauce in this recipe for the best flavour. If you can't get hold of any or if you are making a vegetarian curry, you can substitute with soy sauce, Worcestershire sauce or seaweed paste.
Thai green curry paste: For best results I recommend making the Thai green curry paste yourself. However, if you don't have time to make the paste the best alternative is to buy a jar of pre-made paste. Bear in mind that the homemade paste can be made in advance and kept in the fridge for up to a week or frozen for up to 3 months.
Flour: The flour is used in this recipe as a thickening agent. If you prefer a Thai green sauce with a thin consistency or if you are making a gluten free version then leave this out. See expert tips below for alternative ways to thicken a curry sauce.
Extra spiciness: If you like your Thai green curry spicy then add chopped, fresh green chillies during cooking.
How to make curry sauce thicker: Use full fat coconut milk in the recipe. The reduced fat versions are more watery and so will ultimately thin out the sauce. Coconut milk can also lose its consistency when boiled rapidly over a prolonged period. So even though reducing a sauce does thicken it, rapidly boiling in this instance will not help. When making this recipe, ensure that the the finished Thai green curry is heated gently until just boiling before serving. 
Other options for thickening the Thai green curry sauce include:
  1. Add full fat yogurt, but be aware that this will reduce the spiciness of the dish, so you may need to add more chillies at the same time. Only add yogurt right at the end of cooking - too much heat and the yogurt will curdle. Take the Thai green curry off the heat and stir in enough yogurt to reach your desired consistency.
    Instead of serving rice at the side, mix it directly into your curry whilst still in the pan. Then serve.
  2. If adding vegetables that release water during cooking (e.g. courgettes, mushrooms) roast these in the oven first and then mix into the finished curry.
  3. Add flour to the curry. To avoid flour lumps forming I usually mix 1 tablespoon of flour with a bit of water to form a paste. Then add the flour paste to the curry and mix well. For best results add the flour paste before its heated up to much. Then stir continually until the sauce thickens and the flour is 'cooked out'.
Storage: Once made, allow the Thai green curry to completely cool then transfer to a sealable container and keep in the fridge for 2 days or or in the freezer for up to 3 months. Defrost in the fridge overnight. Reheat in a pan or in the microwave until piping hot throughout.

Nutrition

Serving: 400g | Calories: 763kcal | Carbohydrates: 20g | Protein: 60g | Fat: 51g | Saturated Fat: 40g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 160mg | Sodium: 556mg | Potassium: 1517mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 8g | Vitamin A: 4354IU | Vitamin C: 46mg | Calcium: 115mg | Iron: 10mg

This post was first published in May 2018. Updated in March 2021 with an improved recipe, new images, step by step photos and expert tips

The post Thai Green Curry Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/thai-green-curry/feed/ 4
Thai Green Curry Paste https://properfoodie.com/thai-green-curry-paste/ https://properfoodie.com/thai-green-curry-paste/#respond Tue, 16 Mar 2021 23:09:46 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=9071 A fragrant and spicy Thai green curry paste. Make your own Thai green paste at home with this simple and quick recipe that can be whipped up in 10 minutes. Use this Thai paste as a base for a fragrant, homemade Thai green curry recipe or jar it up and save for later. [feast_advanced_jump_to] 👩🏻‍🍳...

Read More

The post Thai Green Curry Paste appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>

A fragrant and spicy Thai green curry paste. Make your own Thai green paste at home with this simple and quick recipe that can be whipped up in 10 minutes. Use this Thai paste as a base for a fragrant, homemade Thai green curry recipe or jar it up and save for later.

A small jar filled with homemade Thai green curry paste with a spoonful of paste and a chopped up green finger chilli at the side.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

Most curry recipes will call for some kind of curry paste, whether thats homemade or out of a jar grabbed off the supermarket shelf. Theres nothing wrong with the latter. Sometimes a jar of paste and a packet of microwave rice are just the ticket on a busy weekday night. That said, if I have the time and where-with-all to get out my blender and chop up a few ingredients, then I most certainly will. Not only does homemade curry paste taste amazing but the fragrant aromas that fill the kitchen are just too good to miss.

This recipe is adapted from the Thai recipes I made in 2012 in Thailand when attending the Siam Rice cookery school in Chang Mai, Northern Thailand.

🥘 Ingredients

To make this easy Thai green curry paste recipe you will need:

Ingredients needed to make Thai green curry paste.

Ingredient notes

Green chillies: The chillies used here will ultimately determine how hot your curry is. So if you like it spicy then use hotter chillies. For Thai green Curry paste, green chillies are required. Use the smaller, thinner finger chillies for extra heat or use the larger green chillies for a milder flavour. If you would prefer no spice at all then just replace the chillies with green bell pepper (capsicum).

Ginger: If you can get hold of galangal (Thai ginger) then definitely use that here. If not, standard fresh ginger is just fine. If you can't get hold of any type of fresh ginger than you can substitute for jarred ginger.

Coriander: Coriander is a great flavour in Thai paste and so I don't recommend that you substitute or leave it out. This recipe uses both fresh and ground coriander for full flavour and a burst of colour.

Garlic: You can substitute for 2 teaspoon of garlic paste, instead of cloves, if preferred.

Lime: this paste recipe uses both the juice and the zest

Lemongrass: You can substitute this for jarred lemongrass if preferred.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Start by preparing the ingredients: Roughly chop the shallots, lemongrass and green chillies, peel and slice the garlic and ginger, and zest the whole lime and juice half of it.
  2. Set up a small blender or smoothie maker. Then add all of the ingredients plus 1 tablespoon of water.
  3. Start the blender and blend until a thick, smooth paste has formed. If the blender has trouble getting going add another tablespoon of water. Make sure to only add small amount of water (1 tablespoon at a time) otherwise your paste will be too thin.
  4. Use the paste to make a Thai green Curry or transfer to a jar or sealable containers and refrigerate for 1 week or freeze for up to 3 months.Collage of 4 images showing step by step how to make this this recipe for steps 1-4.

💭 Expert tips

  • Blending the paste: Use a small blender to make the Thai green paste. If the ingredients don't blend together easily then add a bit of water or olive oil to help get it going. Only add small amounts (1 tbsp) of water or oil each time. Too much and the paste will become thin and runny.
  • Make in advance: Curry pastes are great to make in advance as they store easily and can be used directly in whatever curry you are making as soon as you are ready to make it. I like to batch make my curry pastes and then split into small containers. Each container has enough to make one curry for 2-4 people (3-4 tbsp). These can be stored in the fridge or freezer and then called upon when needed. Frozen paste can be microwaved for a minute or two and can then be used right away.
  • Scaling this recipe: The ingredients for this recipe will make around 6 tablespoons of Thai green paste. To make more just increase the amounts of ingredients. Doubling the ingredients will produce 12 tablespoons.

❓ Frequently asked questions

Is this curry paste hot?

Out of all the Thai currys, Thai green curry is the hottest, despite the belief that Thai red curry is the hotter of the two. This is mainly down to the chillies used. Green chillies (particularly green birds eye chilli peppers) tend to be hotter than red. So whether the paste is hot or too spicy for you, is dependent on the ingredients used and the amounts. If you like it spicy add plenty of small green chillies. If not, add less and go for a bigger sized chilli pepper. If a milder curry is much more your thing then try Panang curry, or Massaman curry, or even a thai yellow curry.

What is the difference between Thai red and Thai green curry paste?

The main difference between Thai green and Thai red curry paste is the colour and the heat, both of which come from the type of chillies used. Substituting one paste for other will ultimately dictate the type of curry you end up making.

How much curry paste is needed to make a curry?

2-3 tablespoon of paste is usually enough when making a curry for 2-4 people.

How to store?

Once made, Thai green curry paste can be transferred to a jar and kept in the fridge for up to a week or in the freezer for up to 3 months.

A small jar filled with home Thai green curry paste with teaspoon of paste being held above the jar.

🍛 Other curry paste recipes:

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

A small jar filled with homemade Thai green curry paste with a spoonful of paste and a chopped up green finger chilli at the side.
Print

Thai green curry paste

A fragrant and spicy Thai green curry paste. Make your own Thai green paste at home with this simple and quick recipe that can be whipped up in 10 minutes. Use this Thai paste as a base for a fragrant, homemade Thai green curry recipe or jar it up and save for later.
Course Dinner, paste, sauce
Cuisine Thai, Thailand
Prep Time 10 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 6 tablespoon
Calories 42kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 100 g Shallots roughly chopped
  • 2 garlic cloves roughly chopped
  • 10 g piece of fresh ginger peeled and sliced
  • 8 green finger small chillies
  • 1 large green chilli pepper
  • 1 stalk lemongrass
  • 20 g fresh coriander stems and leaves
  • 1 teaspoon ground coriander
  • ½ lime juiced
  • 1 lime zested
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon fish sauce
  • 1 or 2 tablespoon of water if needed for blending

Instructions

  • Start by preparing the ingredients: Roughly chop the shallots, lemongrass and green chillies, peel and slice the garlic and ginger, and zest the whole lime and juice half of it.
  • Set up a small blender or smoothie maker. Then add all of the ingredients plus 1 tablespoon of water.
  • Start the blender and blend until a thick, smooth paste has formed. If the blender has trouble getting going add another tablespoon of water. Make sure to only add small amounts of water (1 tablespoon at a time) otherwise your paste will be too thin.
  • Use the paste to make a Thai green Curry or transfer to a jar or sealable containers and refrigerate for 1 week or freeze for 1 month.

Video

Notes

Is this curry paste hot? Out of all the Thai currys, Thai green curry is the hottest, despite the belief that Thai red curry is the hotter of the two. This is mainly down to the chillies used. Green chillies (particularly green birds eye chilli peppers) tend to be hotter than red. Use the smaller, thinner finger chillies for extra heat or use the larger green chillies for a milder flavour. If you would prefer no spice at all then just replace the chillies with green bell pepper (capsicum).
How much curry paste is needed to make a curry? 2-3 tablespoon of paste is usually enough when making a curry for 2-4 people.
How to store? Once made, Thai green curry paste can be transferred to a jar and kept in the fridge for up to a week or in the freezer for up to 3 months.
Blending the paste: Use a small blender to make the Thai green paste. If the ingredients don't blend together easily then add a bit of water or olive oil to help get it going. Only add small amounts (1 tbsp) of water or oil each time. Too much and the paste will become thin and runny.
Make in advance: Curry pastes are great to make in advance as they store easily and can be used directly in whatever curry you are making as soon as you are ready to make it. I like to batch make my curry pastes and then split into small containers. Each container has enough to make one curry for 2-4 people (3-4 tbsp). These can be stored in the fridge or freezer and then called upon when needed. Frozen paste can be microwaved for a minute or two and can then be used right away.
Scaling this recipe: The ingredients for this recipe will make around 6 tablespoons of Thai green paste. To make more just increase the amounts of ingredients. Doubling the ingredients will produce 12 tablespoons.

Nutrition

Serving: 1tablespoon | Calories: 42kcal | Carbohydrates: 5g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 2g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 91mg | Potassium: 113mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 228IU | Vitamin C: 4mg | Calcium: 16mg | Iron: 1mg

This post was first published in May 2018. Updated in March 2021 with an improved recipe, new images, step by step photos and expert tips.

The post Thai Green Curry Paste appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/thai-green-curry-paste/feed/ 0
Chimichurri Steak Platter https://properfoodie.com/steak-platter-chimichurri/ https://properfoodie.com/steak-platter-chimichurri/#comments Wed, 17 Feb 2021 18:02:54 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=2220 Chimichurri steak platter recipe! Pan fried steak sliced into tender, juicy strips and served with fragrant chimichurri sauce. Make this steak platter and fabulous Argentinian dressing in just over 30 minutes. Perfect for a Saturday night in with a posh steak dinner. [feast_advanced_jump_to] 👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe This easy meal is great for a...

Read More

The post Chimichurri Steak Platter appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>

Chimichurri steak platter recipe! Pan fried steak sliced into tender, juicy strips and served with fragrant chimichurri sauce. Make this steak platter and fabulous Argentinian dressing in just over 30 minutes. Perfect for a Saturday night in with a posh steak dinner.

Slices of medium-rare steak positioned over a pile of cubed rosemary potatoes with a herb and chilli dressing being spooned over the top.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

This easy meal is great for a Saturday night in with a bottle of red and a good film. I love to have this dish with a good helping of rosemary potatoes and an avocado salad on the side. Its a lot of food, but sometimes a massive feast on a weekend is just what I need. If I'm going to eat big this is the way I like to do it - plenty of protein and lots of interesting flavours.

No need to peel the potatoes, just roughly chop, season and pop in the oven. The herby chimichurri dressing takes just 5 minutes to make. Throw all the ingredients into a blender or grab a knife and get chopping! It also keeps really well in the fridge, so its no problem to make ahead of time. The juicy steak is cooked simply in a pan and just 10 minutes before you're ready to eat.

This is also a great dish if you're cooking for a few people. Just pile everything on to a board to create a steak sharing platter and let people help themselves!

🥘 Ingredients

To make this chimichurri steak platter recipe you will need:

Ingredients needed to make chimichurri steak platter.

Ingredient notes

Steak: This recipe uses rump steak but you could also use sirloin, ribeye, fillet or flat iron. Fillet is very lean and tender and so tends to be the most expensive. - Great for a special occasion. For more details on different steak cuts have a look at this page on choosing the right steak or this guide to different beef cuts.

Herbs: Always use fresh herbs in chimichurri sauce for full flavours and bold colours.

Chilli: Always taste the chilli to test the level of heat before adding. For more heat add in smaller green chillies.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Preheat the oven to 200°C (400°F) and make sure steaks are out of the fridge and coming up to room temperature. Prepare the potatoes by slicing into 2cm cubes (skins can be left on). Place cubed potatoes in a bowl and add 1 tablespoon oil and 1 teaspoon dried rosemary. Toss together and mix well then transfer onto a baking tray. Bake in the oven for 30-35 minutes until golden brown. Check and turn half way through cooking.
  2. While the rosemary potatoes are cooking, prepare the chimichurri dressing. Finely chop the fresh parsley, fresh coriander, basil leaves, red chilli and garlic. Place all the chopped ingredients on the same chopping board.
  3. Use the knife blade to start to bring together all the chopped ingredients. Continue to chop whilst mixing the herbs until everything is well minced together.
  4. Transfer the chopped herbs, chilli and garlic to a small bowl and add 4 tablespoon olive oil and 2 tablespoon red wine vinegar.Collage of 4 images showing step by step how to make this recipe for steps 1-4.
  5. Mix the oil and vinegar into the herbs. Add more oil to loosen the sauce further if necessary. Cover and chill in the fridge until ready to serve.
  6. Start to prepare the rump steaks when there is 15 minutes left on the timer for the rosemary potatoes. Place a large griddle pan or frying pan on a high heat. Prep the steak by drizzling both sides with olive oil and seasoning well. Then use your fingers to rub the oil and seasoning into the meat.
  7. Once the pan is hot place the rump steaks in the pan, they should sizzle immediately. Leave to cook on the first side for 3-4 minutes.
  8. Turn over and cook for 2 minutes on the other side (rare – medium), adjust the time according to your preferences). Once cooked transfer to a chopping board and cover with foil. Allow to rest for 5 minutes.Collage of 4 images showing step by step how to make this recipe for steps 5-8.
  9. Slice the cooked steak and serve alongside the rosemary potatoes and chimichurri dressing.

💭 Expert tips

  • Remove steaks from the fridge at least an hour before you cook them so that they are at room temperature.
  • Use fresh herbs for the chimichurri sauce to make sure the dressing is full of flavour and colour
  • To save time whiz up the chimichurri ingredients in a small food processor or blender rather than chopping. However, chopping is the best way to really experience all the fantastic aromas!

❓ Frequently asked questions

Whats the best steak to use for chimichurri steak?

When pan frying a steak I always opt for rump steak. Rump tends to be marbled with more fat so resulting in a rich and full flavoured steak. Rump steaks are also bigger and better value (and better for feeding hungry mouths!).

How to cook the perfect steak?

Steak should to be cooked when you want to eat it and not before. It should also be given all the time and attention it needs. But really it doesn't need that long, 15 minutes max and you have yourself a beautiful steak. The recipe below gives the times for a rare-medium steak. You can adjust this depending on how well done you like your meat. (2 mins on each side for rare and 6 mins on each side for well done).

For a perfect steak make sure the pan is hot and that the the rump steaks are seasoned and rubbed with oil. Once in the pan try not to touch the steaks or move around until you are ready to turn. Check how well-done they are by pushing on the meat with your finger, the firmer the meat the more cooked in the middle. Always remember to rest the steaks for at least 5 minutes before slicing and serving.

Can this recipe be made in advance?

Its quite straight forward to make this chimichurri steak, which makes it a great dish for a lazy weekend. Most of this recipe can be prepped in the morning leaving you with a couple of things to do later on when you're ready to eat.

The chimichurri sauce can be made in advance and refrigerated. The potatoes can be chopped and seasoned ready for the oven. The steak can be brought out of the fridge an hour or two before cooking in order to bring up to room temperature.  If you really want to save time later you could bake the cubed potatoes, cool and refrigerate, and then just reheat in the oven for 5 minutes or so when you're ready for them.

What to serve with Chimichurri steak?

As well as serving this steak platter with some delicious rosemary potatoes or Foil Pack Potatoes, I also love to serve a massive bowl of Mango Avocado Salad on the side. The creamy avocado flesh goes so well with the meat and spicy chimichurri dip. If you decide to have the avocado salad make you cut the avocado just before you serve the meal. This will keep the avocado nice and fresh and stop it turning brown. Or use another one of my easy avocado recipes as an accompaniment.

Slices of rump steak cooked medium rare and served over cubed potatoes with a chimichurri dressing drizzled over the top.

🍖 Other steak recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Slices of medium-rare steak positioned over a pile of cubed rosemary potatoes with a herb and chilli dressing being spooned over the top.
Print

Chimichurri Steak Platter

Chimichurri steak platter recipe! Pan fried steak sliced into tender, juicy strips and served with fragrant chimichurri sauce. Make this steak platter and fabulous Argentinian dressing in just over 30 minutes. Perfect for a Saturday night in with a posh steak dinner.
Course Dinner, Main Course
Cuisine argentinian, spanish
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 35 minutes
Servings 2 people
Calories 889kcal

Equipment

  • Mixing bowl
  • Knife
  • chopping board
  • Griddle pan

Ingredients

For the steaks

  • 2 Rump steaks
  • 1 tablespoon oil
  • Pinch salt

For the potatoes

  • 2 large potatoes
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon dried rosemary
  • Pinch salt

For the chimichirri dressing

  • 20 g fresh parsley
  • 10 g fresh coriander
  • 10 g basil leaves
  • 1 garlic clove
  • 1 red chilli
  • 4 tablespoon oil
  • 2 tablespoon red wine vinegar

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 200°C (400°F) and make sure steaks are out of the fridge and coming up to room temperature. Prepare the potatoes by slicing into 2cm cubes (skins can be left on). Place the cubed potatoes in a bowl and add 1 tablespoon oil and 1 teaspoon dried rosemary. Toss together and mix well then transfer onto a baking tray. Bake in the oven for 30-35 minutes until golden brown. Check and turn half way through cooking.
  • While the rosemary potatoes are cooking, prepare the chimichurri dressing. Finely chop the fresh parsley, fresh coriander, basil leaves, red chilli and garlic. Place all the chopped ingredients on the same chopping board.
  • Use the knife blade to start to bring together all the chopped ingredients. Continue to chop whilst mixing the herbs until everything is well minced together.
  • Transfer the chopped herbs, chilli and garlic to a small bowl and add 4 tablespoon olive oil and 2 tablespoon red wine vinegar.
  • Mix the oil and vinegar into the herbs. Add more oil to loosen the sauce further if necessary. Cover and chill in the fridge until ready to serve.
  • Start to prepare steak when there is 15 minutes left on the timer for the rosemary potatoes. Place a large griddle pan or frying pan on a high heat. Prep the rump steak by drizzling both sides with olive oil and seasoning well. Then use your fingers to rub the oil and seasoning into the meat.
  • Once the pan is hot place the rump steaks in the pan, they should sizzle immediately. Leave to cook on the first side for 3-4 minutes.
  • Turn over and cook for 2 minutes on the other side (rare – medium), adjust the time according to your preferences. Once cooked transfer to a chopping board and cover with foil. Allow to rest for 5 minutes.
  • Slice the steak and serve alongside the rosemary potatoes and chimichurri dressing.

Notes

Expert tips:
  • Remove steaks from fridge at least an hour before you cook them so that they are at room temperature.
  • Use fresh herbs for the chimichurri sauce to make sure the dressing is full of flavour and colour.
  • To save time whiz up the chimichurri ingredients in a small food processor or blender rather than chopping. However, chopping is a best way to really experience all the fantastic aromas!
 
Whats the best steak to use for this recipe? When pan frying a steak I always opt for rump steak. Rump tends to be marbled with more fat so resulting in a rich and full flavoured steak. Rump steaks are also bigger and better value (and better for feeding hungry mouths!).
How to cook the perfect steak? The recipe above gives the times for a rare-medium steak. You can adjust this depending on how well done you like your meat. (2 mins on each side for rare and 6 mins on each side for well done).

For a perfect steak make sure the pan is hot and that the the rump steaks are seasoned and rubbed with oil. Once in the pan try not to touch the steaks or move around until you are ready to turn. Check how well-done they are by pushing on the meat with your finger, the firmer the meat the more cooked in the middle. Always remember to rest the steaks for at least 5 minutes before slicing and serving.
Can this recipe be made in advance? The chimichurri sauce can be made in advance and refrigerated. The potatoes can be chopped and seasoned ready for the oven. The steak can be brought out of the fridge an hour or two before cooking in order to bring up to room temperature.  If you really want to save time later you could bake the cubed potatoes, cool and refrigerate, and then just reheat in the oven for 5 minutes or so when you're ready for them.
What to serve with Chimichurri steak? As well as serving this steak platter with some delicious rosemary potatoes or Foil Pack Potatoes, I also love to serve a massive bowl of Mango Avocado Salad on the side. The creamy avocado flesh goes so well with the steak and spicy chimichurri dip. If you decide to have the avocado salad make you cut the avocado just before you serve the meal. This will keep the avocado nice and fresh and stop it turning brown. Or use another one of my easy avocado recipes as an accompaniment.

Nutrition

Serving: 1steak with dressing and potatoes | Calories: 889kcal | Carbohydrates: 47g | Protein: 56g | Fat: 53g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 138mg | Sodium: 156mg | Potassium: 2006mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 1664IU | Vitamin C: 98mg | Calcium: 127mg | Iron: 7mg

This post was first published in August 2016. Updated in February 2021 with an improved recipe, new images, step-by-step photos and recipe tips.

If you would like to access the original recipe you can do so here: Original Steak and Chimichurri recipe 2016

The post Chimichurri Steak Platter appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/steak-platter-chimichurri/feed/ 2
Roast Pumpkin Soup with Chestnuts https://properfoodie.com/pumpkin-soup-chestnuts-honey/ https://properfoodie.com/pumpkin-soup-chestnuts-honey/#comments Thu, 29 Oct 2020 01:37:09 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=5236 No other recipe says autumn as much as this roast pumpkin soup recipe. Its made with roast pumpkin flesh and roast chestnuts, which blend together to create a gorgeous, deep golden colour with a sweet and nutty taste. Make this soup in under an hour and enjoy all the goodness that autumn produce has to...

Read More

The post Roast Pumpkin Soup with Chestnuts appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>

No other recipe says autumn as much as this roast pumpkin soup recipe. Its made with roast pumpkin flesh and roast chestnuts, which blend together to create a gorgeous, deep golden colour with a sweet and nutty taste. Make this soup in under an hour and enjoy all the goodness that autumn produce has to offer.

Bowl of pumpkin soup topped with a swirl of cream and a second bowl of soup in the background

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

Roasting a huge pumpkin and then turning it into soup is so, so satisfying, especially at this time of year when pumpkins are absolutely everywhere. With the nights drawing in and the weather turning colder its so nice to embrace the change and sit down to a warming bowl of homemade roast pumpkin soup.

Pumpkin and chestnuts are such a wonderful combination and it works so well here. Once the two ingredients have been roasted and then blended together they create a sweet and creamy flavour. A delightful earthiness comes from the pumpkin with a smokey taste in the background from the roast chestnuts.

🥘 Ingredients

To make this roast pumpkin soup for 4 people you will need:

The ingredients required to make spiced pumpkin soup, labelled with white text.

Ingredient notes

Pumpkin: The good old pumpkin is actually a type of winter squash and so any variety of winter squash will work well here. So if you're fresh out of pumpkins, substitute with butternut squash. Use either 2 small squash or 1 medium squash.

Alternatively, if you want to make this soup in double quick time, you can use 2 tins of pumpkin puree.

Chestnuts: This recipe uses raw shelled chestnuts, which need to be roasted and the shells removed. See how to roast chestnuts for instructions. However, if you prefer you can buy and use pre cooked chestnuts with the shells removed (this will be quicker and easier, but I do enjoying roasting chestnuts myself at this time of year!)

If you can't get hold of any chestnuts, replace with nuts of a similar flavour such as hazelnuts or pecans.

Cream: The cream in this recipe is completely optional. I love to add it in right at the end to lighten up the soup and to make it super creamy. However, the chestnuts alone provide a creaminess to this soup. So if you want to keep things a little healthier, just remove the cream.

🔪 Step by step instructions

If you are roasting your own chestnuts make sure you prepare these first before starting the recipe. See 'How to roast chestnuts' post. Alternatively use pre roasted and de shelled chestnuts.

  1. Pre heat the oven to 200°C (400°F). Use a large knife to halve the pumpkin(s), then scoop out and discard the seeds. Place the pumpkin halves on a baking tray and rub the flesh with a little oil
  2. Place the pumpkins into the oven and bake for 30 minutes or until soft. (Soft when a knife will easily press into the flesh)
  3. Meanwhile, chop and fry onions in a large pan until soft. (TIP: use a large pan to give your self plenty of room for all the ingredients and then space to hand blend).
  4. Remove the roast pumpkin from the oven and allow to cool slightly then peel or slice off the skin. Chop up the flesh and add to the onions along with chopped roasted chestnuts.A collage of four step by step images of how to make the first part of the pumpkin soup recipe. 1. prepare pumpkin, 2. roast pumpkin, 3. fry onions, 4. add roast pumpkin and chopped chestnuts to onions.
  5. Next add the sage, oregano, stock cubes and salt and pepper.
  6. Add around 800ml of boiled water to the pan then stir together well.
  7. Use a hand blender or transfer the soup to a blending machine and blend until smooth.
  8. Stir in the cream then serve with extra cream, pumpkin seeds and a sprinkle of parsley.Second 4 step by step instruction images for making pumpkin soup: 5. add spices, 6. add stock, 7. blend, 8. add cream.

❓ Frequently asked questions

Can this soup be frozen?

If you plan to freeze this soup, make sure to leave out the cream. Dairy products don't freeze and reheat well, so leave out the cream and add this in later when you have defrosted and reheated.

Once the soup is made (minus the cream) leave to cool then transfer to sealable containers and freeze for up to 3 months. Defrost on the side overnight the reheat in a pan over a low heat until just simmering. Do not boil.

Why should I roast the pumpkin?

Firstly, roasting pumpkin intensifies the flavour and caramelised the natural sugars in the flesh. Secondly, its far easier to remove the skin and slice up the flesh once roasted, rather than try to do it raw.

Can spices be added to this soup?

This recipe uses herbs and chestnuts. However, if you would prefer a spiced pumpkin soup recipe just replace the sage and oregano with coriander and cumin.

Pumpkin soup being ladled into a bowl

🍂 Other Autumn recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Bowl of pumpkin soup topped with a swirl of cream and a sprinkle of pumpkin seeds and parsley.
Print

Roast Pumpkin Soup with Chestnuts

No other recipe says autumn as much as this roasted pumpkin soup recipe. Its made with roast pumpkin flesh and roast chestnuts, which blend together to create a gorgeous, deep golden colour with a sweet and nutty taste. Make this soup in under an hour and enjoy all the goodness that autumn produce has to offer.
Course Appetizer, Dinner, Soup, starter
Cuisine British
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 4 people
Calories 552kcal

Equipment

  • Baking trays for roasting pumpkin and chestnuts
  • Extra large pan for making soup
  • Hand blender or blending machine

Ingredients

  • 2 tablespoon oil
  • 2 small or 1 medium pumpkin or 2 tins of pumpkin puree
  • 2 onions peeled and diced
  • 400 g raw shells on chestnuts or 200g cooked de-shelled chestnuts
  • 1 teaspoon oregano
  • 1 teaspoon sage
  • 2 vegetable stock cubes
  • Salt and pepper
  • 800 ml boiling water
  • 250 ml single cream
  • Pumpkin seeds and chopped parsley to serve

Instructions

  • If you are roasting your own chestnuts make sure you prepare these first before starting the recipe. See 'How to roast chestnuts' post. Alternatively use pre roasted and de shelled chestnuts. Roughly chop up roasted chestnuts before adding to the recipe.
  • Pre heat the oven to 200°C (400°F). Use a large knife to halve the pumpkin(s), then scoop out and discard the seeds. Place the pumpkin halves on a baking tray and rub the flesh with 1 tablespoon oil
  • Place the pumpkins into the oven and bake for 30 minutes or until soft. (Soft when a knife will easily press into the flesh)
  • Meanwhile, chop and fry onions in 1 tablespoon oil a large pan until soft. (TIP: use a large pan to give your self plenty of room for all the ingredients and then space to hand blend).
  • When the pumpkin is cooked, remove from the oven and allow to cool slightly then peel or slice off the skin. Chop up the pumpkin flesh and add to the onions along with chopped roasted chestnuts.
  • Next add the sage, oregano, stock cubes and salt and pepper.
  • Add around 800ml of boiled water to the pan then stir together well.
  • Use a hand blender or transfer the soup to a blending machine and blend until smooth. (Note: if soup needs reheating after blending, return to the pan and heat to a gentle simmer. Do not boil.)
  • Stir in the cream then serve with extra cream, pumpkin seeds and a sprinkle of parsley.

Notes

Substitutions:
  • Pumpkins can be replaced with any kind of winter squash or if you’re in a rush and don’t have time to roast the squash you can use 2 tins of pumpkin puree instead.
  • If you can’t get hold of raw chestnuts or don’t have the to roast them you an replace with re-cooked and shelled chestnuts. Or completely replace chestnuts with hazelnuts or pecans.
  • For a healthier version leave out the cream
 
Can this soup be frozen?
If you plan to freeze this soup, make sure to leave out the cream. Dairy products don't freeze and reheat well, so leave out the cream and add this in later when you have defrosted and reheated.
Once the soup is made (minus the cream) leave to cool then transfer to sealable containers and freeze for up to 3 months. Defrost on the side overnight the reheat in a pan over a low heat until just simmering. Do not boil.
Why should I roast the pumpkin?
Firstly, roasting pumpkin intensifies the flavour and caramelised the natural sugars in the flesh. Secondly, its far easier to remove the skin and slice up the flesh once roasted, rather than try to do it raw.
Can spices be added to this soup?
This recipe uses herbs and chestnuts. However, if you would prefer a spiced pumpkin soup recipe just replace the sage and oregano with coriander and cumin.

Nutrition

Serving: 500g | Calories: 552kcal | Carbohydrates: 73g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 28g | Saturated Fat: 13g | Cholesterol: 69mg | Sodium: 380mg | Potassium: 2204mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 16g | Vitamin A: 43218IU | Vitamin C: 80mg | Calcium: 192mg | Iron: 5mg

This post was first published in October 2017. Updated in October 2020 with an improved recipe, new images, new step-by-step photos and new recipe tips & FAQs.

The post Roast Pumpkin Soup with Chestnuts appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/pumpkin-soup-chestnuts-honey/feed/ 8
How To Roast Chestnuts https://properfoodie.com/how-to-roast-chestnuts/ https://properfoodie.com/how-to-roast-chestnuts/#respond Sun, 25 Oct 2020 17:13:10 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=16203 Cosy up with a tray of roasted chestnuts straight out of the oven. This easy step by step guide will show you how to roast chestnuts at home without too much hassle or anguish. Prepared and roasted in just 30 minutes, this simple method will have you roasting chestnuts all throughout autumn and winter. [feast_advanced_jump_to]...

Read More

The post How To Roast Chestnuts appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>

Cosy up with a tray of roasted chestnuts straight out of the oven. This easy step by step guide will show you how to roast chestnuts at home without too much hassle or anguish. Prepared and roasted in just 30 minutes, this simple method will have you roasting chestnuts all throughout autumn and winter.

Bowl of roasted and peeled chestnuts with autumnal leaves lining the bowl.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

Roasted chestnuts are as traditional as you can get when it comes to Christmas and food. There is something so delightful and christmassy about the woody, smokey smell that only roasted chestnuts create.

If you have ever wanted to roast your own chestnuts or wondered how to roast chestnuts then this step by step, easy recipe is for you. And by the way....its super simple!

🥘 Ingredients

Theres is nothing complicated or fancy about roasting chestnuts. You just need.....raw chestnuts with their shells on and a pan of water.

Ingredients for roast chestnuts: Bowl of chestnuts with shells on.

Ingredient notes

Chestnuts: Select chestnuts that are firm with a nice rounded shape. Flatter chestnuts tend to be more difficult to cut and peel.

Amount of chestnuts: Once chestnuts are roasted and peeled and ones that won't peel or are bad have been discarded, you are left with around half the weight of what you started with. Therefore buy double the amount of what you like to end up with.

Water: Simmering the chestnuts in water before roasting will help to separate the shells from the nut and will allow the chestnuts to steam once in the oven.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. The most important step in this process, before you do anything, is to slice into the chestnut shells. Use a serrated knife and firmly hold the nut between your thumb and fingers (making a bridge over the knife). Slice one way and then the other to create a cross. Then turn over and do the same on the other side.
  2. Next place the prepared chestnuts into a small pan and cover with boiling water. Place on a medium heat and simmer gently for 5 minutes.
  3. Drain the nuts and transfer to a tray then place in a preheated oven (200°C/392°F) and roast for 15 minutes.
  4. Remove the nuts from the oven and transfer to a bowl. Cover with a towel and leave for 10 minutes to continue steaming.Images of how to roast chestnuts for steps 1-4: 1. slice a cross into the shells, 2. place chestnuts in a pan with boiling water and simmer for 5 minutes, 3. transfer nuts to a tray and roast for 15 minutes, 4. leave to steam in a bowl covered with a towel.
  5. Uncover the bowl after 10 minutes and check that the shells are starting to open.
  6. Peel and remove the shells, discarding any that won't peel or that appear to be bad.Images of how to roast chestnuts for steps 5-6: 5. Uncover chestnuts and check shells have started to open. 6. Peel and remove the shells discarding and that won't de-shell or that appear to be bad.

💭 Expert tips

  • Score a cross in both sides of the chestnut shell. This ensures that the water gets in all around the nut and fully steams once in the oven. This will help when peeling.
  • When scoring in the crosses make sure to cut all the way through the shell and reach the kernel.
  • Once roasted, transfer the chestnuts to a bowl and cover immediately to trap the heat and continue the steaming process.

❓ Frequently asked questions

How to serve?

Roasted chestnuts are a fantastic snack and great to nibble on just as they are. Serve with the shells on or off and place in a brown paper bag for that extra touch of authenticity.

Do you have to soak chestnuts before roasting?

Strictly speaking you don't have to soak and simmer chestnuts before roasting. However, skipping this step will make it much harder to peel the nuts.

How long do chestnuts last?

Uncooked and unpeeled chestnuts will keep for 2-3 weeks when stored in a dry and well ventilated place. Cooked chestnuts should be stored in the fridge and will keep for 2-3 days.

What else can you do with roasted chestnuts?

Chestnuts can be a great addition to autumnal and winter dishes. Try in a salad or add to a stuffing mix. I also use roasted chestnuts in my roast pumpkin soup recipe.

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Bowl of roasted and peeled chestnuts with autumnal leaves lining the bowl.
Print

How To Roast Chestnuts

Cosy up with a tray of roasted chestnuts straight out of the oven. Prepared and roasted in just 30 minutes, this simple method will have you roasting chestnuts all throughout autumn and winter.
Course Snack
Cuisine British
Diet Diabetic, Gluten Free, Low Salt
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 2 people
Calories 392kcal

Equipment

  • Small sauce pan
  • Large bowl
  • Tea towel

Ingredients

  • 400 g raw chestnuts with shells on
  • Boiling water from the kettle

Instructions

  • The most important step in this process, before you do anything, is to slice into the chestnut shells. Use a serrated knife and firmly hold the nut between your thumb and fingers (making a bridge over the knife). Slice one way and then the other to create a cross in the shell. Then turn over and do the same on the other side. Repeat for all nuts.
  • Next place the prepared chestnuts into a small pan and cover with boiling water. Place on a medium heat and simmer gently for 5 minutes.
  • Drain the nuts and transfer to a tray then place in a preheated oven (200°C/392°F) and roast for 15 minutes.
  • Remove the nuts from the oven and transfer to a bowl. Cover with a towel and leave for 10 minutes to continue steaming. Uncover the bowl after 10 minutes and check that the shells are starting to open.
  • Peel and remove the shells, discarding any that won't de-shell or that appear to be bad.
  • Serve with the shells on or off and place in a brown paper bag for that extra touch of authenticity.

Notes

Chestnuts: Select chestnuts that are firm with a nice rounded shape. Buy double the amount of what you like to end up with.
(Once chestnuts are roasted and peeled and ones that won't peel or are bad have been discarded, you are left with around half the weight of what you started with).
Water: Simmering the chestnuts in water before roasting will help to separate the shells from the nut and will allow the chestnuts to steam once in the oven.
Do you have to soak chestnuts before roasting? Strictly speaking you don't have to soak and simmer chestnuts before roasting. However, skipping this step will make it much harder to remove the shells from the nuts.
Storage: Uncooked and unpeeled chestnuts will keep for 2-3 weeks when stored in a dry and well ventilated place. Cooked chestnuts should be stored in the fridge and will keep for 2-3 days.
What else can I do with roast chestnuts? Chestnuts can be a great addition to autumnal and winter dishes. Try in a salad or add to a stuffing mix. I also use roasted chestnuts in my spiced pumpkin soup recipe.

Nutrition

Serving: 150g | Calories: 392kcal | Carbohydrates: 88g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 3g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 4mg | Potassium: 968mg | Vitamin A: 52IU | Vitamin C: 80mg | Calcium: 38mg | Iron: 2mg

The post How To Roast Chestnuts appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/how-to-roast-chestnuts/feed/ 0
Fajita Chicken salad https://properfoodie.com/fajita-chicken-salad/ https://properfoodie.com/fajita-chicken-salad/#respond Tue, 05 Jan 2016 22:52:58 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=1558 Spicy fajita chicken salad served with rice. Chicken fajita platter Happy New Year! My first creation of the year is this delicious (and healthy) fajita spiced chicken platter. Its loaded with chicken and rice, which are both smothered in the rich flavours of cumin and paprika - yum! The addition of the salad gives an...

Read More

The post Fajita Chicken salad appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Spicy fajita chicken salad served with rice.

Fajita Chicken Platter|Properfoodie.com

Chicken fajita platter

Happy New Year!

My first creation of the year is this delicious (and healthy) fajita spiced chicken platter. Its loaded with chicken and rice, which are both smothered in the rich flavours of cumin and paprika - yum! The addition of the salad gives an extra crunch and the creamy avocado complements the spicy fajita sauce perfectly. It might just be the perfect healthy dish needed to kick-start 2016!

I’m always up for a platter of food, be it at home or dining out. I’d like to think this is because I enjoying sharing my dinner 🙂 …but it’s more likely because I enjoy the super large quantity that’s presented on arrival of said platter. And yes I’m first to start and more often than not; last to finish 🙂

Chicken fajitas

So this dish takes all the main ingredients of chicken fajitas (minus the wrap) and lays out all its colourful ingredients on one mouth-watering platter; all you need to do is dive in with a fork.

So we already know how well a smoky fajita sauce combines oh so well with chunks of juicy chicken and crunchy bell pepper, particularly when topped with guacamole, cheese, salsa, sour cream...and anything else with an extra boost of calories and fat that I can get my hands on. However, as it is New Year and overindulgence was on the cards last months, this recipe tries to keep only the healthy elements without cutting back on taste. The serving of avocado on a bed of lettuce provides a lovely alternative to guacamole and the helping of rice not only soaks up any escaping drizzles of fajita sauce but also saves on the need for any tortilla wraps. Healthy but by no means boring!! Enjoy!

Wraps

If your after something with wraps then why not try chicken tinga burritos, paprika chicken wraps or beef brisket burritos.

📖 Recipe

Fajita spiced chicken platter with avocado salad
Print

Fajita Spiced Chicken Platter

Spicy fajita chicken salad served with rice.
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 45 minutes

Ingredients

For the Fajita sauce:

  • Juice of 1 lime
  • 1 tablespoon rapeseed oil
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 teaspoon paprika
  • 1 teaspoon ground coriander

For the platter:

  • 2 chicken breasts sliced into strips along the width of breast
  • 1 red onion cut into eighths
  • ½ red pepper cut into 3cm chunks
  • ½ orange pepper cut into 3cm chunks
  • 1 red chilli deseeded and sliced
  • 250 g rice
  • Iceburg lettuce
  • Avocado stone removed and sliced
  • Lime wedges to serve

Instructions

  • First mix the sauce in a bowl by combining the lime juice, oil and spices. Season the sliced chicken then add to the sauce and mix well to ensure chicken is fully coated.
  • Heat a large frying pan or wok. Once hot, pour in the chicken and bring sauce to a simmer and cook chicken for 5 minutes.
  • Next add the onion, chilli and peppers to the pan. Mix well to coat vegetables with the sauce then cover with a lid and leave to simmer for 10 minutes, stirring occasionally.
  • Meanwhile, cook the rice according to the instructions and prepare the salad. If serving up on a platter; simply arrange a few lettuce leaves on the top third of the board and cover with slices of avocado. Finish off with a drizzle of olive oil and season with salt and pepper.
  • Once the rice is cooked, drain and spoon out along the bottom third of the board. Check the chicken and veg are thoroughly cooked then spoon out down the middle section of the board. Cut a couple of limes into wedges and dot around the edges of the board before presenting in the middle of the table.

 

The post Fajita Chicken salad appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/fajita-chicken-salad/feed/ 0
Roasted Red Pepper, Tomato and Basil Soup https://properfoodie.com/roasted_red_pepper_tomato_soup/ https://properfoodie.com/roasted_red_pepper_tomato_soup/#comments Thu, 16 Jun 2016 12:41:58 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=1920 Warming roasted red pepper, tomato and basil soup This Roasted Red Pepper and Tomato Soup, with all its red veggie goodness, has been on our table several times over the last couple of weeks. I honestly can't get enough of it; with the intense flavour from the well-roasted peppers, mixed in with the sweetness from...

Read More

The post Roasted Red Pepper, Tomato and Basil Soup appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Warming roasted red pepper, tomato and basil soup

This Roasted Red Pepper and Tomato Soup, with all its red veggie goodness, has been on our table several times over the last couple of weeks. I honestly can't get enough of it; with the intense flavour from the well-roasted peppers, mixed in with the sweetness from the tomatoes and the peppery anise from the basil. It really is a heavenly bowl of slurpful, deliciousness.

Rosted Red Pepper and Tomato Soup
Roasted Red Pepper and Tomato Soup

I decided it was time to get back into soup-making a few weekends ago, as summer is now here and I can no longer get away with hiding under huge jumpers and saying that I need that extra layer of fat to keep me warm. Yes its definitely time to trim up. I always find the best way to do this is with soups and salads. But only with the best and most tastiest soups and salads, otherwise i'd be straight back on the chocolate and chips in no time. So I intend to make my next few posts all about the summer trim down. (With the exception of the wedding cake post - Coming soon!!).

So if, like me, you are feeling the need to transform from a fat waddling caterpillar into a bright, floating butterfly then this soup is a good place to start. Its a really easy recipe and can be made in bulk for the fridge or freezer for those "no time!!" days.

Roasted Red pepper and Tomato soup in a Jar (for the fridge - keep for 5 to 7 days)
Roasted Red pepper and Tomato soup in a Jar (for the fridge - keep for 5 to 7 days)

Its also great to take to work or have as a snack if your feeling super peckish in between meals. And its more than likely a dish that will please everyone; from friends round for dinner to your children's mates starving after a long day at school.... lets face it most kids love tomato soup and this is the creme de la creme of tomato soups. Tomato soup was definitely my favourite as a child and I think the only thing thats changed is the topping, instead of grated cheese its now creme fraiche - so grown up 🙂

Right well I'm off to finish my sisters wedding cake - busy busy, hoping I can show the finished result soon!!

Happy soup making!!

📖 Recipe

Roasted Red pepper and Tomato soup in a Jar
Print

Roasted Red Pepper, Tomato and Basil Soup

Warming roasted red pepper, tomato and basil soup
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 45 minutes

Ingredients

  • 6 tablespoon olive oil
  • 3 large onions roughly chopped
  • 2 cloves garlic finely chopped
  • 15 medium vine ripened tomatoes quartered and seeds removed
  • 3 large red peppers capsicum, de-seeded and roughly chopped
  • 1 teaspoon dried marjoram
  • 1 teaspoon dried oregano
  • Handful of fresh basil leaves
  • Salt and pepper to season
  • Natural yogurt/Creme Fraiche to serve optional

Instructions

  • Pre-heat oven to 200 degrees C. Fill kettle and boil.
  • Place the chopped tomatoes and peppers onto two separate trays, drizzle each tray with 2 tablespoon olive oil and season well. Place in the oven and bake for 30 minutes or until edges start to blacken.
  • Whilst the tomatoes and peppers are in the oven; heat up 2 tablespoon oil in a large pan, add the onions and fry slowly until soft. Add the garlic, dried herbs and stir. Once cooked, add the tomatoes and peppers to the onions along with all the cooking juices. Mix together well and add around 250ml of hot water from the kettle. Bring to the boil and then remove from the heat.
  • Transfer the vegetables and all juices to a blender or use an electric hand blender to create a smooth soup. Add more water if the soup appears to thick (should coat the back of a spoon. Tear up the basil leave, add to the soup and briefly blend again.  
  • Finally, pass the soup through a sieve to achieve a lovely smooth finish - use the back of a spoon to ensure all the soup is pushed through the sieve. - Get as much through as possible so to not take away any flavour. Reheat slightly if necessary (but don't boil). Season if required and serve.
  • Soup can be stored in the fridge for 5-7 days or if you want to keep it for longer; transfer to a container and freeze. 

The post Roasted Red Pepper, Tomato and Basil Soup appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/roasted_red_pepper_tomato_soup/feed/ 1
Butternut Squash Soup with Celery and Sage https://properfoodie.com/butternut-squash-soup/ https://properfoodie.com/butternut-squash-soup/#comments Thu, 28 Jul 2016 20:45:21 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=2029 Roasted butternut squash soup with celery and sage. This healthy soup recipe is one of my favourite ways to use up all those late summer veggies. The aromatic sage and earthy celery create an amazing green Goddess-style colour and also go incredibly well with the sweet, roasted butternut squash. A topping of feta and crushed...

Read More

The post Butternut Squash Soup with Celery and Sage appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Roasted butternut squash soup with celery and sage. This healthy soup recipe is one of my favourite ways to use up all those late summer veggies. The aromatic sage and earthy celery create an amazing green Goddess-style colour and also go incredibly well with the sweet, roasted butternut squash. A topping of feta and crushed pistachios and we have ourselves one incredible soup.

Butternut Squash soup

Roasted Butternut squash soup

Reasons to put this recipe to the top of your 'mid-week tea' list or even your 'recipes to make for the freezer' list, right now:

  • It’s chocker with lots of healthy vegetables.
  • It fills you up in next to no time.
  • And it looks amazing with all those vibrant greens shining through from the celery and sage. What’s not to love about this soup?

Butternut squash can also be used to pad out a creamy pumpkin pasta dish and is also great in a quinoa salad side dish, which I usually serve with my satay chicken recipe.

Do you peel butternut squash before cooking?

Theres no need to peel butternut squash before cooking. Not only is this incredibly difficult but it also takes a good while to peel when raw. Its definitely so much easier to peel the skin off a roasted butternut squash. My favourite thing about preparing this squash soup is the roasting of the butternut.

How do you roast butternut squash?

  1. Chop the butternut squash in half length ways
  2. Scoop out the seeds with a spoon.
  3. Seeds can be discarded or washed, dried and then turned into a lovely snack by roasting in the oven until crisp.
  4. Drizzle oil over the exposed flesh of the butternut squash. Place on a baking tray and pop in the oven for around an hour.
  5. The squash is cooked when the tip of a knife easily pushes into the flesh.
  6. Remove from the oven a cool before peeling off the skin.

Roasted Butternut squash

So delicious! Baking the squash without peeling it means that the skin comes away from the flesh with no hassle, so this really is an easy dish.

Can you eat the skin of butternut squash?

The skin of butternut squash can be quite tough and so generally its best to remove. However, the skin can be edible if you roast the squash until the skin starts to soften.

How do you make roasted butternut squash soup?

  1. First roast the squash as instructed above
  2. Whilst the butternut squash is cooking the rest of the soup can be prepared. Heat up 1 tablespoon of oil in a large pan or casserole dish. Add chopped onion and garlic and fry gently for 5 minutes or until slightly caramelised.
  3. Next add the chopped celery, 1 teaspoon oregano and black pepper. Stir well before pouring in 750ml of vegetable stock. Bring to the boil and then simmer gently for 20 minutes.
  4. Chop the roasted squash into chunks and add to the soup. Mix in well and then add the freshly chopped sage.
  5. Next transfer the soup to a blender and blitz until smooth. This is best done in batches to avoid over filling the blender.

Recipe Tip: Transfer the bulky veg to the blender first with only a little of the stock liquid. Gradually add more stock whilst blending until the desired consistency is achieved. If all the stock is used and the soup is still too thick; extra tap water can be added. A good consistency is when the soup just coats the back of a spoon.

How long will this recipe keep?

Once made store this soup in a sealed container and keep in the fridge for up to 3 days

Can I freeze homemade squash soup?

Yes homemade butternut squash can be frozen. Make sure the soup is cooled before transferring to a sealable container, then store in the freezer for up to 3 months. Defrost thoroughly before reheating. Make sure reheated soup is piping hot all the way through.

serve the soup with feta and pistachios

How do you add cream to soup without it curdling?

To prevent curdling always take soup off the heat and allow to cool slightly before adding cream. Adding cream or yogurt to a soup can really add to the flavour as well as help to thicken soup with a thinner consistency.

What should I serve with this recipe?

Every good soup deserves warm homemade mini bread rolls, perfect for dunking and moping up. If you're having this soup as a starter to a 3 course dinner then why not follow with a roast beef dinner or comforting fish pie. For more 3 course meal ideas have a look at my collection of romantic dinner recipes. Love soup? Have a look at all my soup recipes here.

 1 hour 15 minutes to make recipegluten free recipeunder 500 kcal recipehigh in nutrients recipeVegetarian Recipe

📖 Recipe

butternut squash soup
Print

Butternut Squash Soup with Celery and Sage

Roasted butternut squash soup with celery and sage. This healthy soup recipe is one of my favourite ways to use up all those late summer veggies. The aromatic sage and earthy celery create an amazing green Goddess-style colour and also go incredibly well with the sweet, roasted butternut squash. A topping of feta and crushed pistachios and we have ourselves one incredible soup.
Course aperitivo, Appetizer, lunch, starter
Cuisine British
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 45 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 15 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 401.7kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 large butternut squash (1600g - raw whole weight)
  • 2 tablespoon olive oil
  • 2 large onions chopped (200g)
  • 2 cloves garlic finely chopped
  • 2 sticks of celery chopped
  • 1 teaspoon dried oregano
  • Black pepper
  • 750 ml vegetable stock
  • Fresh sage leaves (5 leaves, stalks removed and roughly chopped)
  • Water to add if required
  • Salt and pepper to season
  • Pistachios and feta to top (optional)

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 180°C. Halve the butternut squash - you'll need a large knife for this and a little bit of patience. Scoop out the seeds, and either discard or roast in the oven and serve as a snack. Keep the skin on - we will remove this after cooking!
  • Place the halved squash on a baking tray and drizzle with olive oil. Use your fingers to spread the oil evenly over the flesh. Place the squash in the oven and bake for around 1 hour. Check regularly, the squash will be cooked when it starts to caramelise and the tip of a knife can be pressed easily in to the flesh. Once cooked remove from the oven and set to one side to cool.
    Roasted Butternut squash
  • Whilst the butternut squash is cooking the rest of the soup can be prepared. Heat up 1 tablespoon of oil in a large pan or casserole dish. Add chopped onion and garlic and fry gently for 5 minutes or until slightly caramelised. Next add the chopped celery, 1 teaspoon oregano and black pepper. Stir well before pouring in 750ml of vegetable stock. Bring to the boil and then simmer gently for 20 minutes.
  • Whilst the soup is simmering, remove the skin from the cooling squash. This can be done by either peeling the skin away or by scooping out the flesh with a spoon. Once the skin is completely removed chop the squash into chunks and add to the soup. Mix in well and then add the freshly chopped sage.
  • Next transfer the soup to a blender and blitz until smooth. This is best done in batches to avoid over filling the blender.
  • Recipe Tip: transfer the bulky veg to the blender first with only a little of the stock liquid. Gradually add more stock whilst blending until the desired consistency is achieved. If all the stock is used and the soup is still too thick; extra tap water can be added. A good consistency is when the soup just coats the back of a spoon.
  • Finally pass the blended soup through a sieve, taste and add salt and pepper if required. If serving immediately reheat gently in a pan but do not boil. Serve in bowls and top with chopped pistachios and crumbled feta cheese if desired.
  • If storing for another day do not reheat. Transfer to sealable containers and keep in the fridge for up to 3 days or in the freezer for up to 1 month.

Nutrition

Serving: 706g | Calories: 401.7kcal | Carbohydrates: 40.7g | Protein: 17.2g | Fat: 20.3g | Saturated Fat: 5.7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8.8g | Sodium: 680mg | Fiber: 3.8g | Sugar: 23g

PIN FOR LATERButternut squash soup with celery and sage and topped with feta and chopped pistachios

The post Butternut Squash Soup with Celery and Sage appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/butternut-squash-soup/feed/ 2
Celery, Apple and Blue Cheese Soup https://properfoodie.com/celery-apple-blue-cheese-soup/ https://properfoodie.com/celery-apple-blue-cheese-soup/#comments Thu, 13 Oct 2016 12:48:50 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=2643 With the nights drawing in and with the noticeable drop in air temperature, I feel the need to get out my big pan and cook up some freezable batches of soup. This garden soup is a brand new recipe and one that came about due to the tonnes and tonnes of celery leaves we've had...

Read More

The post Celery, Apple and Blue Cheese Soup appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
With the nights drawing in and with the noticeable drop in air temperature, I feel the need to get out my big pan and cook up some freezable batches of soup. This garden soup is a brand new recipe and one that came about due to the tonnes and tonnes of celery leaves we've had in our veg patch this year.

celery and blue cheese soup | ProperFoodie

Why make this recipe?

Its rustic, its hearty and its a really properly homemade soup. The fresh taste from the celery leaves is nicely balanced here with the sweet apples and the bitter blue cheese. It really is a soup that has it all and is just what I want to come home to on a dark, rainy night.

Celery

Not something at the top of most people shopping lists and I know a lot of people would rather avoid celery. However, the humble celery stick is highly regarded in our household....more so since the creation of this great soup (and maybe a little more so by me than Ben, I could eat celery all day long).

Why is celery good for you?

  • Its super low in calories and fat (guilt free eating all the way)
  • It contains a good amount of fibre so is great for digestion.
  • Its shape, texture and strength make it perfect for chopping into crudites for dips. (check out my beetroot and red pepper dip for something sweet and zinging to dip your celery into).
  • Its ridiculously easy to grow. It really does take care of itself; as long as it has good soil and the room to grow to its full potential (a good 30cm between plants). The yield is also pretty good, especially in terms of leaves.
  • It can be used in all types of recipes and really gives a great boost to the flavour: salads, stews, soups, pesto. (watch out for my celery pesto post coming soon)
  • Its leaves, which are often over looked, usually have the most flavour and have a lovely deep green colour. As each plant supplies a large quantity of leaves; its more than likely that celery growers will find themselves over run. As the leaves are so bulky it can be extremely difficult to store them, so celery leaf soups, stews and pestos are the perfect solution. They look so pretty as well with the vibrant bright green shining through.

Ingredients

To make this celery, apple and blue cheese soup you will need:

  • Olive oil
  • Onions
  • Garlic cloves
  • Green apples
  • Celery stalks
  • Fresh sage leaves
  • Dried oregano
  • Celery leaves (optional)
  • Vegetable stock
  • Blue cheese plus extra for topping
  • Salt and pepper to taste
Celery leaves | ProperFoodie
onions | ProperFoodie
apples | ProperFoodie
celery apple and blue cheese soup | ProperFoodie

Growing celery

  • Celery needs its space to grow fully and its surprising how much it will spread. So leave plenty of room between plants.
  • Celery is ready to harvest when the sticks are around 20cm or more in length.
  • Healthy celery has upright stems which snap. Stems should not be limp and bendy.
  • Leaves should be fresh, crisp and a darker green to the rest of the plant
  • When harvesting try to keep the stem connected at the base and store as a whole plant. This helps to keep its freshness. Celery can be kept in the fridge for several weeks.
  • The leaves are less easy to store as they are quite bulky and there can be a lot just on one plant. They are also at their freshest and tastiest just after being removed from the stems. Therefore, remove and use as soon as you can. If you can't use all the leaves place washed leftovers in a bowl, cover with cling film and keep in the fridge for up to a week.
  • If using the stalks in a recipe, use a peeler and scrape away the outer layer, which will remove the stringy bits which can be quite annoying if they get stuck in your teeth.
  • If you're making this soup in a big batch for freezing, leave the blue cheese out and add later. Defrost, reheat and then melt in the cheese before serving. The fresh cheese really adds to the taste of the soup and helps bring it back to life. It also means you'll have some cheese leftover for a pretty topping.
  • Not a fan of blue cheese? Then leave it out. Its still a very tasty dish with plenty of flavour. Or you could always replace with a different cheese - I imagine a cream cheese would work really well.

Other autumnal recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

celery, apple and blue cheese garden soup | ProperFoodie
Print

Celery, Apple and Blue Cheese Garden Soup

A hearty celery soup with sweet apples and blue cheese. Perfect for a cold, autumnal night.
Course Appetizer, starter, starter or main
Cuisine British
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 25 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 45 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 223kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 2 Onions peeled and chopped
  • 2 garlic cloves finely chopped
  • 300 g of sweet green eating apples core removed and roughly chopped
  • 450 g celery stalks peeled to remove the stringy bits and chopped
  • 10 fresh sage leaves
  • 5 g oregano leaves or half teaspoon dried oregano
  • 250 g celery leaves washed and roughly chopped
  • 700 ml vegetable stock
  • 100 g blue cheese plus extra for topping
  • Salt and pepper to taste

Instructions

  • In a large stock pan heat the olive oil, add the garlic and onions, then gently cook for 2-3 minutes.
  • Next add the apples, celery stalks, sage and oregano. Stir well before pouring in the stock.
  • Bring to a simmer and then add the celery leaves. Mix well to help the leave to wilt.
  • Pop on the lid and leave to simmer gently for 20 minutes, check occasionally.
  • Once the celery and apple have softened remove from the heat and ladle the soup into a blender. Blend on high for 5 minutes to ensure the soup in nice a smooth, then return to the pan. To create a perfectly smooth consistency; sieve the soup back into the pan (make sure you push as much through the sieve as possible, otherwise some flavour may be lost).
  • (if freezing your soup, stop at this point and ladle into seal-able containers - add blue cheese and seasoning when ready to defrost and reheat)
  • Put the blended, sieved soup back on a low heat and melt in the blue cheese. Taste and add more cheese if desired and season.

Nutrition

Serving: 338g | Calories: 223kcal | Carbohydrates: 25g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Cholesterol: 19mg | Sodium: 1241mg | Potassium: 702mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 15g | Vitamin A: 1412IU | Vitamin C: 13mg | Calcium: 243mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Celery, Apple and Blue Cheese Soup appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/celery-apple-blue-cheese-soup/feed/ 4
Sugared Pecans and Chocolate Stars https://properfoodie.com/sugared-pecans-chocolate-stars/ https://properfoodie.com/sugared-pecans-chocolate-stars/#comments Mon, 21 Nov 2016 09:00:53 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=2857 Crunchy, sugared pecans with a sweet, crumbly layer of sugar. These amazing sugared pecans are perfect as Christmas gifts or are great as toppings on Christmas desserts alongside my chocolate stars and chocolate Christmas trees. This time of year can be so exciting with Christmas still far enough away not to panic or go on any...

Read More

The post Sugared Pecans and Chocolate Stars appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
jump-to-recipe-button

Crunchy, sugared pecans with a sweet, crumbly layer of sugar.

These amazing sugared pecans are perfect as Christmas gifts or are great as toppings on Christmas desserts alongside my chocolate stars and chocolate Christmas trees. This time of year can be so exciting with Christmas still far enough away not to panic or go on any last minute shopping trips; but its still close enough to start thinking ahead and preparing a few little treats.

chocolate-christmas-cake-decorations

Both of these equally delightful and fun treats are really easy to make and add that personal touch, which is always nice at Christmas. The sugared pecans can be made up to one month in advance and store really well in jars, which can be transformed into lovely gifts with a little ribbon and a nice tag

sugared pecans in jars

The chocolate stars and Christmas trees are a little more delicate and serve better as toppings on Christmas cakes and puddings. See my Christmas cake recipe here.

properfoodie christmas cake with chocolate decor and sugared pecans

For the chocolate shapes I recommend using piping bags and practising your piping on a scrap bit of paper to check the consistency of the chocolate and to decide how you want to create your shapes. For the sugared pecans try to break them up whilst they are still warm and just out of the oven. Big bits of unwanted sugar can be easily broken off each nut later on.

white chocolate star decorations

For the perfect home made foodie gift this Christmas: Try making these along with some delicious cranberry mince pies 🙂


📖 Recipe

sugared pecans just out of the oven
Print

Sugared Pecan Nuts and Chocolate Stars

Sugared Pecan Nuts and Chocolate Stars; perfect for Christmas gifts or as toppings on Christmas desserts
Total Time 2 hours
Servings 2 medium jars of nuts and 2-3 trays of chocolate shapes

Ingredients

For the Sugared Pecan Nuts

  • 200 g pecan nuts
  • 1 medium egg white
  • 1 tablespoon tap water
  • 100 g white caster sugar
  • 100 g light brown muscovado sugar
  • 1 teaspoon allspice
  • Pinch crushed sea salt flakes
  • Silicon or grease proof paper

For the Chocolate Stars

  • 100 g milk chocolate baking
  • 100 g white chocolate baking
  • Silicon or grease proof paper
  • Piping bags

Instructions

For the Sugared Pecan Nuts

  • Pre-heat the oven to 160 degrees C (fan) and line a baking tray with silicon or grease proof paper.
  • Start by whisking together the egg white and water until frothy (1-2 mins) and set to one side.
  • In a bowl mix together the white sugar, muscovado sugar, allspice and salt.
  • Add the frothy egg white mixture to the sugar mix and combine, then mix in the nuts ensuring they are fully coated.
  • Transfer the coated nuts to the lined baking tray and spread out evenly across the surface.
  • Place in the oven for 30 minutes. Check at 15 mins, stir / un-stick and then re-spread across the tray.
  • After 30 minutes remove from the oven and break up using a spatula before allowing to fully cool.
  • Once cool use as cake decorations or transfer to jars for storage (can be stored for up to one month).

For the chocolate stars

  • Set up a bain marie on the hob: large pan with 1 cm of water in the bottom and a glass bowl balanced on top of the pan. Heat the pan until the water is boiling.
  • Break up the milk chocolate into 1-2cm pieces and place in the glass bowl. Ensure that the bowl is not touching the water. Leave the chocolate to melt and do not stir until it is fully melted. (Alternatively chocolate can be melted in a microwave - heat in 20 second bursts and stir in between until fully melted).
  • Once melted allow to cool a little and then transfer to piping bags.
  • Repeat this process with the white chocolate.
  • As the chocolate cools it will become slightly thicker and so easier to pipe out - however, left for too long it will solidify in the piping bags. Piping bags can be left near a warm oven to keep the chocolate in its melted state.
  • Lay out some silicon or grease proof paper and snip a small amount off the end of one of the piping bags. How much you snip off will depend on how thick you want the chocolate to be. I suggest having a scrap piece of paper and practising the piping, snipping more off the end of the piping bag if required.
  • Pipe out star shapes and Christmas tree shapes (or other shapes - but try to keep it simple) and then transfer to the fridge for 1 hour in order to set. Once set carefully peel the chocolate shapes off the paper and position on your cake or dessert.
  • Tip: Try to pipe out shapes that are well connected - shapes that are empty in the middle aren't as strong and will break as you try to remove them from the paper.

Nutritional information? For Christmas treats? No idea where I've put that 🙂

 

This post contains affiliate links, which means if you click the link and then go on to purchase I will receive a percentage of the cost. See my privacy policy and disclosure statement for further details.

sugared-pecans-and-chocolate-stars

The post Sugared Pecans and Chocolate Stars appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/sugared-pecans-chocolate-stars/feed/ 6
Quick Chicken and Almond Curry https://properfoodie.com/quick-chicken-and-almond-curry/ https://properfoodie.com/quick-chicken-and-almond-curry/#comments Thu, 20 Jul 2017 12:31:34 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=4508 Its time for a quick chicken curry!! A one pan meal, prepared and cooked in under 30 minutes with all the taste and flavour of an Indian take away. Chicken and almond Curry Sometime the body craves a good old British curry and our tummies will not be satisfied with anything less. With takeaways and...

Read More

The post Quick Chicken and Almond Curry appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Its time for a quick chicken curry!! A one pan meal, prepared and cooked in under 30 minutes with all the taste and flavour of an Indian take away.

chicken and almond curry

Chicken and almond Curry

Sometime the body craves a good old British curry and our tummies will not be satisfied with anything less.

With takeaways and curry houses all over the place, its no hardship to pop out and fulfil that need to gorge on a rich lamb rogan josh or creamy chicken korma. And of course there's always plenty of room for popadums, and samosa,  and naan bread. . . and you can't just get one type can you - - you have to try the peshwari naan and the chilli naan and ooh what about a coriander naan  🙄

Easy chicken and almond curry

It can all get out of control very quickly. Trust me I know - I have been there, I have walked the dark path of shame the next morning with a slight garlic hangover and huge bloated belly.

So, what to do?? Obviously you know I'm going to tell that you can make it yourself. And homemade curry is one of the most satisfying things to eat, once you've gone to the effort of making it! My usual chicken tikka curry, although fantastic, does take a while to make and does including the making of your own tikka paste. Likewise for my super authentic Thai green curry with Thai green curry paste, Thai red curry with Thai red curry paste and Massaman curry with Massaman curry paste. All very nice, and great if you have the whole day to cook and you're after a romantic dinner recipe for a cosy night in. But not great when its late and you need a curry - right now.

The point of this recipe was to create a tasty authentic curry dish, with minimal ingredients and time, but maximum flavour and enjoyment. The fact that this can also be thrown into one pan really saves on time and washing up. I do like a one pan meal and even like to make my own fish biryani rice dish in the tradition dum way (steaming everything in one pot).

Easy chicken curry ingredients

So here they are - the basic ingredients needed to make a great, simple, healthy and super quick chicken curry

  • Chicken breast
  • Bell pepper
  • Tinned tomatoes
  • Curry powder
  • Ground almonds
  • Garlic
  • Juice of half a lemon
  • Fresh coriander
  • Flaked almonds

No coconut milk, or yogurt or cream or lashings of oil. This is curry, at its best, without the overload of fat and calories.

Easy chicken curry ingredients

How to make quick chicken curry

To make this dish, all you need to do is pop everything into one big pan. - I promise its that straight forward. I usually start by sprinkling the raw chicken with the curry powder and adding a bit of seasoning.

Curry powder on to chicken

The chicken is then quickly fried off in a hot griddle pan with the addition of fresh coriander stalks. The griddle pan really speeds up the cooking process and is what makes this recipe 'super quick'.

chicken curry powder and fresh coriander

Once the chicken is browned off and cooked through, everything else is added to the pan - in no particular order. Then stirred and simmered for a few minutes - so it looks like this ↓

Quick chicken and almond curry

YUMMY!!

How do I make my chicken curry sauce thicker?

The griddle pan is also really useful for helping to create a nice thick sauce, as it quickly evaporates away any excess water from the tinned tomatoes.

Quick chicken and almond curry

And thats it - done - serve up, top with yogurt and toasted, flaked almonds (optional!!) and tuck in!

Easy chicken and almond curry

I personally find this chicken curry to be fantastic on its own, particularly if its mid week and I'm trying to eat healthily. However, a bit of rice or roti bread will help make this a truly, great Indian feast.

chicken and almond curry

Other chicken recipes you can make in a hurry

📖 Recipe

quick chicken curry
Print

Quick Chicken and Almond Curry

Its time for curry!! A one pan meal, prepared and cooked in under 30 minutes with all the taste and flavour of an Indian take away.
Course Dinner, Main Course
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 2 people
Calories 453.6kcal

Ingredients

  • 400 g Chicken breast diced fat trimmed off
  • 30 g fresh coriander separate the stems from the leaves
  • 2 teaspoon medium curry powder
  • 2 cloves of garlic crushed
  • Sea salt and Black pepper
  • Half tablespoon olive/coconut oil
  • 400 g tinned chopped tomatoes plus 1 can refilled with water
  • 20 g ground almonds
  • 100 g orange bell pepper roughly chopped
  • juice of half a lemon

Optional:

  • 1 tablespoon fat free Greek Yogurt
  • 10 g Toasted almond flakes

Equipment:

  • Griddle pan

Instructions

  • For best and quickest results use a large griddle pan for cooking. Food items will cook a lot quicker using this method so remember to check and stir regularly.
  • 1.Firstly prepare the fresh coriander by separating the stems from the leaves. Place the leaves to one side for later. Finely chop the stems and also place to one side.
  • 2.Next dice the chicken into 2cm cubes and place in a large bowl. Add the curry powder, coriander stems, crushed garlic, salt and pepper and mix well to fully coat in the seasoning.
  • 3.Place the griddle pan on a medium-high heat and add the oil. Then add the seasoned chicken to the griddle pan and fry off evenly, using a wooden spoon to stir and turn the chicken. Once the chicken is cooked and a golden brown colour on all sides, add the bell pepper, tinned tomatoes, ground almonds, and stir well. Refill the tomato can with tap water and place to one side.
  • 4.Bring the curry to a gently simmer and cook for 5-10 minutes. Place a lid over the pan during this time, if you have one. Check regularly and gradually add the water from the tomato can if the sauce begins to get too dry.
  • 5.Add the lemon juice, stir and remove from the heat.
  • 6.Taste and add more seasoning or lemon juice if desired.
  • 7.Finally, roughly chop the coriander leaves and add to the curry before serving.
  • Serve in bowls topped with yogurt and flaked almonds.
  • NB: If cooking up a large batch the curry can be transferred to sealable containers and frozen for up to 3 months.

Nutrition

Serving: 493g | Calories: 453.6kcal | Carbohydrates: 12.9g | Protein: 69.8g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 4.3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Sodium: 560mg | Sugar: 10.5g

The post Quick Chicken and Almond Curry appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/quick-chicken-and-almond-curry/feed/ 14
Chicken Satay and Quinoa Salad https://properfoodie.com/chicken-satay-quinoa-salad/ https://properfoodie.com/chicken-satay-quinoa-salad/#comments Tue, 08 Aug 2017 22:04:55 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=4605    Juicy Chicken pieces smothered in a sweet Satay Sauce, with a good helping of Squash & Edamame Quinoa Salad, and extra sauce for dipping  Chicken Satay Chicken Satay is the perfect summer comfort food. Its warm and creamy, yet light and refreshing, with plenty of Asian flavours knocking about to ensure your tastebuds will...

Read More

The post Chicken Satay and Quinoa Salad appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
   Juicy Chicken pieces smothered in a sweet Satay Sauce, with a good helping of Squash & Edamame Quinoa Salad, and extra sauce for dipping 

chicken satay with satay sauce

Chicken Satay

Chicken Satay is the perfect summer comfort food. Its warm and creamy, yet light and refreshing, with plenty of Asian flavours knocking about to ensure your tastebuds will not be disappointed. Sauces, condiments and dressings can sometimes be the trickiest part of a recipe, but often this is the very thing that makes a meal really great. This satay sauce is so quick and so simple that it leaves no excuses for not turning a simple piece of Chicken into a really fantastic dinner.

chicken satay with quinoa salad

And just to show off how easy and super duper this dish really is, and to let you know how much I love it, theres not 1 but 2 videos below. Thats right - I'm getting super fancy now with videos as well as photos!!

Satay Ingredients

My satay sauce requires no more than soy sauce, peanut butter and tahini with a teaspoon of coriander, a squeeze of lime juice and grated ginger and garlic.

satay ingredients listed

Quinoa Salad

Because this is most definitely a summer dish, I love to serve my chicken satay with a full flavoured quinoa salad.

Fluffy quinoa mixed with squash, mint and edamame beans help keep this salad bright, refreshing, healthy and of course mega tasty.

Quinoa ingredients listed

Quinoa is one of the easiest grains to cook. Just cover with stock, pop on a lid, simmer for 15 minutes or until all the liquid has been absorbed, then set to one side with the lid on for 10 minutes, before fluffing up with a fork.

To make this recipe even more lovable and mid-week worthy; make the sauce ahead of time and use as a marinade for the chicken until you are ready to cook. The quinoa salad will also keep well in the fridge, if made the day before.

chicken satay with quinoa salad

If you love this satay sauce recipe, check out my easy tikka paste recipe which is also great with chicken and good to keep handy in the fridge.

**Estimated nutritional information per serving of chicken satay and quinoa salad and per 100g. If you want to find out more about how the information is calculated and the sources used, please refer to my Nutrition Information Guide.

Watch how to make squash and edamame quinoa salad

1 hour 30 minutes to make recipe1 of 5 a day recipe gluten free recipe high in protein recipe

📖 Recipe

Chicken satay
Print

Chicken Satay and Quinoa Salad

Juicy chicken breasts smothered and baked in a sweet satay sauce, with a good helping of squash and edamame quinoa salad and extra sauce for dipping
Course Dinner, lunch
Cuisine Asian, Indonesian
Prep Time 45 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 15 minutes
Servings 4 People
Calories 586kcal

Ingredients

For the Chicken Satay

  • 2 Chicken Breasts
  • 1 clove garlic
  • 2 cm piece of ginger peeled
  • 1 teaspoon ground coriander
  • 1 tablespoon light soy sauce for gluten free recipe check soy sauce is a gluten free version
  • 2 tablespoon smooth peanut butter
  • 2 tablespoon Tahini
  • 1 Juice of lime
  • 50 ml cold water

for the quinoa salad

  • 100 g dried quinoa
  • 500 ml veg stock
  • ½ Juice of lime
  • 150 g butternut squash - skin removed and squash cubed
  • 50 g edamame beans
  • Handful of fresh mint leaves
  • Black pepper

To Garnish

  • Extra mint leaves
  • Chopped cashew nuts
  • Fresh cornflowers if desired

Instructions

  • Pre heat the oven to 180 degrees C

For the Chicken satay

  • In a large bowl grate the ginger and garlic, then add the dried coriander, soy sauce, peanut butter, tahini, lime juice and water. Whisk together well until smooth a creamy. Spoon out a few large spoonfuls of the satay sauce and set to one side to serve as dip later on.
  • Using a sharp knife score one side of the chicken breasts with 3 diagonal cuts (this allows the satay to soak into the middle of the chicken). Place the chicken into the bowl of sauce and coat well. Cover the bowl and place in the fridge to marinade for at least 30 minutes, if you have time marinate over night.

For the Quinoa salad

  • Place the cubed squash on a baking tray, drizzle with olive oil and sprinkle over the paprika. Place in the pre heated over and bake for 20 minutes. Check half way through and turn.
  • Meanwhile put the quinoa in a small pan, cover with the stock and pop on a lid. Bring to the boil and then simmer for 15 minutes or until all the water has absorbed. Take off the heat, add juice from half a lime and set to one side with the lid still on for 10 minutes. Then fluff up with a fork, and add the baked squash, edamame beans, mint leaves and black pepper. Mix carefully with a fork. Keep in the fridge until you are ready to serve.

To cook the chicken:

  • Transfer the chicken to an oven proof dish and pour over any excess sauce. Place in the middle of a pre heated oven and bake for 25-30 minutes. Remove from the oven and slice in half on the diagonal, check its cooked through.

To serve

  • Spoon out the quinoa salad and place the chicken on top before finishing off with chopped cashews, cornflower petals and extra wedges of lime.

Video

Nutrition

Serving: 393g | Calories: 586kcal | Carbohydrates: 42.4g | Protein: 48.5g | Fat: 26.2g | Saturated Fat: 5.5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 8.4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 10.3g | Fiber: 5g

Chicken satay with squash and edamame quinoa salad

I am linking this recipe to #cookblogshare hosted by hijackedbytwins, recipesmadeeasyeverydayhealthyrecipes and Easypeasyfoodie. I am also linking to #brilliantblogposts by honestmum, #CookOnceEatTwice hosted by seachingforspice, and #recipeoftheweek hosted by aMummyToo.

Hijacked By Twins

Brilliant blog posts on HonestMum.comCook Once Eat Twice

Link up your recipe of the week

The post Chicken Satay and Quinoa Salad appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/chicken-satay-quinoa-salad/feed/ 15
Simple Guacamole Recipe https://properfoodie.com/simple-guacamole-recipe/ https://properfoodie.com/simple-guacamole-recipe/#respond Thu, 22 Feb 2018 14:02:15 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=9285 A simple and authentic guacamole recipe with creamy avocado, perfect for spreading on your tacos or for dunking in tortillas. Easy to put together in just 5 minutes and a squeeze of lime helps keeps this lovely Mexican dip nice and fresh Simple guacamole recipe Homemade guacamole is a really easy and tasty dip made...

Read More

The post Simple Guacamole Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
A simple and authentic guacamole recipe with creamy avocado, perfect for spreading on your tacos or for dunking in tortillas. Easy to put together in just 5 minutes and a squeeze of lime helps keeps this lovely Mexican dip nice and fresh

Mexican dip

Simple guacamole recipe

Homemade guacamole is a really easy and tasty dip made with avocado, chillies and lime juice. Perfect for nibbles at get togethers and partys along with other tasty dips such as beetroot hummus, celery, apple and walnut pesto or roasted red pepper dip.  It takes just 5 minute to make this guacamole recipe and its so much better than a shop bought version. Surprisingly, shop bought guacamole tends to include cream, but as avocado has quite a creamy texture already I find its not necessary to add any cream. So lets get to making a homemade, healthy guacamole recipe. For a proper Mexican guacamole recipe I always add chopped chilli, cubed tomato, lime juice and fresh coriander.

mexican guacamole recipe

What is guacamole made of?

  • Avocado flesh
  • Lime juice
  • Fresh red chilli
  • Cubed and deseeded tomatoes
  • freshly chopped coriander
  • Pinch of salt to taste

The main ingredient in a simple guacamole recipe is of course avocado, which is what gives guacamole its recognisable light green colour and creamy texture. The other usual ingredients in a guacamole are tomatoes, lime juice, salt and coriander. Fresh chilli can also be added for a spicy guacamole recipe. A little bit of chopping is required and of course the avocado needs to be cut, de-stoned and the skin removed. For this simple guacamole recipe I tend to mash the avocado flesh with a fork whilst its still in its skin. This just needs the avocado to be cut in half and the stone removed, then mash each half. This is so simple to do and means much less mess.

Guacamole recipe

Can you eat guacamole by itself?

Guacamole is usually used as a dip or topping and not usually eaten on its own. However, whole avocado can often be eaten by itself or in a salad.

How do you make guacamole? (Step-by-Step Guide)

  1. Start by cutting the avocado in half. Move the knife around the stone and then twist the two halves apart with your handshow to cut avocado cut and twist
  2. To remove the avocado stone carefully hit the stone with the blade of the knife then twist and pull out.how to cut avocado
  3. With the skin still on, use a fork to mash up the avocado flesh. The avocado skin acts as a sort of bowl. Then scoop the mashed flesh out and into a bowl.how to slice avocado
  4. Immediately squeeze lime juice over the flesh to prevent it from going brown.how to keep cut avocado fresh
  5. Next add the chopped chilli, cubed tomatoes and most of the chopped coriander to the avocado and mix well. Transfer to a serving bowl and top with the remaining coriander or fresh parsley if you prefer.guacamole recipe

Serving suggestion: serve with crisps and dips, chicken tacos, fajita chicken salad or on top of a smokey chilli con carne.

Can you make guacamole in advance?

Yes guacamole can be made in advance; up to a maximum of 2 days before you will need it. The tricky part is making sure the dip doesn't go brown. I have found the best way to keep guacamole fresh and green is to add the juice of 1 lime for every avocado used. Mix the juice directly into the dip and then place the dip in the fridge in a sealed container or dish wrapped well with cling film. A few more tips and tricks with avocados can be found here.

Do avocado pits keep guacamole from going brown?

No the avocado pit or stone has no use in stopping guacamole from going brown. - so don't be tempted to pop a stone in the middle of your dip - it really won't do anything. In my experience the lime juice and a sealed container method is the best.

Is guacamole vegan?

Yes, when made with just avocado, tomato and chilli, guacamole is suitable for vegans. This simple guacamole recipe and homemade recipes in general are all vegan. However, watch out for shop bought varieties which tend to have cream added to guacamole!!!

Is guacamole dip fattening?

If consumed in huge quantities, yes guacamole is fattening. The fat in guacamole is from the avocado, which is mainly good fats. So half an avocado everyday is a great way to maintain a healthy balanced diet and get in some of those healthy fatty acids. However, the calories and fat are high in avocados so over doing the guacamole isn't advised.

Avocado recipes

For more ideas on how to use avocados have a look at my easy avocado recipes post. Or why not make some paprika chicken wraps, which are great with guacamole added. If you fancy a guacamole dip with a twist why not try pumpkin guacamole?

Under 300 calories1 of 5 a dayLow Carb RecipeVegetarian Recipe

📖 Recipe

guacamole recipe
Print

Simple Guacamole Recipe

A simple and authentic guacamole recipe with creamy avocado, perfect for spreading on your tacos or for dunking in tortillas. Easy to put together in just 5 minutes and a squeeze of lime helps keeps this lovely Mexican dip nice and fresh
Course dip, party food, Snack, starter
Cuisine Mexican
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 0 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 2 people
Calories 118.8kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 large avocado (120g flesh)
  • 1 Juice of a lime
  • ½ fresh red chilli (7g finely chopped)
  • 2 baby tomatoes (35g diced small)
  • Handful of fresh coriander (roughly chopped)

Instructions

  • Half the avocado by slicing the knife into the fruit and move around the stone. Then twist each half in opposite directions and pull apart. 
    how to cut avocado cut and twist
  • To remove the stone carefully hit the blade of the knife into the stone, then twist and pull. 
    how to cut avocado
  • Leave the avocado flesh in the skin and use a fork to carefully mash the flesh and then scoop out. 
    how to slice avocado
  • Add the lime juice to the avocado and mix well. (Lime helps to prevent browning). Then add the chopped chilli, diced tomato and most of the coriander. Mix together well then transfer to a serving bowl and sprinkle over any remaining parsley.
    guacamole recipe

Nutrition

Serving: 81g | Calories: 118.8kcal | Carbohydrates: 1.9g | Protein: 1.4g | Fat: 11.8g | Saturated Fat: 2.5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1.4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7.3g | Sugar: 1.1g

The post Simple Guacamole Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/simple-guacamole-recipe/feed/ 0
Baileys Coffee https://properfoodie.com/baileys-irish-cream-with-coffee/ https://properfoodie.com/baileys-irish-cream-with-coffee/#comments Mon, 10 Dec 2018 19:58:07 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=8166 Baileys coffee made with Baileys Irish Cream! Baileys coffee is an easy recipe to serve up at home as afternoon treat or in place of dessert after a meal. Its especially great at Christmas with a bit of nutmeg sprinkled on top! [feast_advanced_jump_to] ☕ Why make this recipe? Baileys Irish cream is one of my favourite...

Read More

The post Baileys Coffee appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Baileys coffee made with Baileys Irish Cream! Baileys coffee is an easy recipe to serve up at home as afternoon treat or in place of dessert after a meal. Its especially great at Christmas with a bit of nutmeg sprinkled on top!

Baileys coffee made with Baileys Irish Cream

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

☕ Why make this recipe?

Baileys Irish cream is one of my favourite liqueurs to go into a coffee. Its particularly good if you prefer a creamier or milky coffee.

Baileys coffee is super easy to make and all you need is coffee, Baileys Irish Cream, honey and cream.

This particular recipe uses black coffee with Baileys added directly to this. However, a latte coffee (shot of coffee made up with milk) could be used so making a Baileys latte version instead.

Make for an afternoon treat in front of the fire on a colds winter day or whip up this warming baileys beverage for your guests after a festive dinner party.

🥘 Ingredients

To make Baileys coffee for 2 people you will need the following ingredients:

  • 400 ml freshly made black coffee (enough for 2) (instant or ground)
  • 2 tsp Golden syrup or honey
  • 2 x 50ml measures of Baileys Irish Cream
  • 50 ml double cream
  • Freshly grated nutmeg or cocoa powder to serve (optional)

Ingredient notes

Coffee: black coffee can be replaced with latte coffee (a shot of coffee made up with milk) if you would prefer a creamier version or if you don't want the finished drink to be too strong in terms of coffee flavour and caffeine amount.

🔪 Instructions

  1. First heat your mugs or coffee glasses by pouring in warm/boiling water and leaving to warm up for a couple of minutes
  2. Next prepare the coffee (instant/ground/machine) - your choice of black or latte coffee. Make enough to fill your mugs or glasses. Allow this to cool for a few minutes before using. If the coffee is too hot the Baileys will curdle when added.
  3. Empty the water from the glasses or mugs and add a teaspoon of syrup or honey to the bottom of each glass (the sugar will help the cream to float on top when added later on)
  4. Then divide the slightly cooled coffee or latte between to 2 glasses or mugs, leaving around 2 cm of space at the top so the Baileys and cream can be added. Stir well to dissolve the syrup.
  5. Next carefully add a measure of Baileys to each glass. If using black coffee try to pour the Baileys in slowly to allow the liqueur to sit nearer the top so creating gradual change in colour down the glass. 
  6. Finally add the cream to the top: Stir the cream well first then pour slowly over the back of a spoon so the cream sits above the Irish coffee. The tip of the spoon should be just touching the surface of the coffee as you pour and the cream should run off the spoon and onto the top of the Baileys coffee.
  7. Sprinkle over some freshly grated nutmeg or cocoa powder and serve.
Baileys coffee - properfoodie - Debbie Jones

💭 Frequently asked questions

How much baileys to add to a baileys coffee

The standard shot size for a measure of Baileys is 50ml (double measure), which is the amount used in this recipe. As Baileys isn't too strong in terms of alcohol content its usual to use a 50ml measure.

When to have Baileys coffee

Baileys coffee is great at any time of year. Particularly after a filling meal, when you can't quite fit in dessert but still want a treat.

Its also especially good at Christmas. Christmas wouldn't be Christmas without Baileys Irish Cream. I usually take mine on the rocks or even with crushed ice, whilst I'm busy wrapping presents or making one of my Christmas recipes.

Other Christmas recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Baileys latte
Print

Baileys Irish cream with Coffee

Irish cream coffee! Baileys coffee is an easy recipe to serve up at home as afternoon treat or in place of dessert after a meal. Its especially great at Christmas with a bit of nutmeg sprinkled on top!
Course aperitif, aperitivo, beverage, Dessert, digestif, Drinks
Cuisine British, Christmas, irish
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 0 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 2 people
Calories 284kcal

Equipment

  • Coffee Glasses or mugs

Ingredients

  • 400 ml Freshly made black coffee (enough for 2) (Instant or ground)
  • 2 teaspoon Golden syrup or honey
  • 2 50ml measures of Baileys Irish cream
  • 50 ml double cream
  • Freshly grated nutmeg or cocoa powder to serve (optional)

Instructions

  • First heat your mugs or coffee glasses by pouring in warm/boiling water and leaving to warm up for a couple of minutes
  • Next prepare the coffee (instant/ground/machine) - your choice of black or latte coffee. Make enough to fill your mugs or glasses. Allow this to cool for a few minutes before using. If the coffee is too hot the Baileys will curdle when added.
    400 ml Freshly made black coffee
  • Empty the water from the glasses or mugs and add a teaspoon of syrup or honey to the bottom of each glass (the sugar will help the cream to float on top when added later on)
    2 teaspoon Golden syrup or honey
  • Then divide the slightly cooled coffee or latte between to 2 glasses or mugs, leaving around 2 cm of space at the top so the Baileys and cream can be added. Stir well to dissolve the syrup.
  • Next carefully add a measure of Baileys to each glass. If using black coffee try to pour the Baileys in slowly to allow the liqueur to sit nearer the top so creating gradual change in colour down the glass. 
    2 50ml measures of Baileys Irish cream
  • Finally add the cream to the top: Stir the cream well first then pour slowly over the back of a spoon so the cream sits above the Irish coffee. The tip of the spoon should be just touching the surface of the coffee as you pour and the cream should run off the spoon and onto the top of the Baileys coffee.
    50 ml double cream
  • Sprinkle over some freshly grated nutmeg or cocoa powder and serve.
    Freshly grated nutmeg or cocoa powder to serve

Notes

How much baileys to add to coffee: The standard shot for a measure of baileys is 50ml, which is the amount used in this recipe. As baileys isn't too strong in terms of alcohol content its usual to use a 50ml measure. This amount will also allow for the baileys flavour to be distinguished against the coffee.
Substitutions: black coffee can be replaced with latte coffee (a shot of coffee made up with milk) if you would prefer a creamier version or if you don't want the finished drink to be too strong in terms of coffee flavour and caffeine amount.
When to have Baileys coffee: Baileys coffee is great at any time of year. Particularly after a filling meal, when you can't quite fit in dessert but still want a treat. Its also especially good at Christmas.
 

Nutrition

Serving: 258g | Calories: 284kcal | Carbohydrates: 21g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 16g | Saturated Fat: 10g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Cholesterol: 34mg | Sodium: 14mg | Potassium: 117mg | Sugar: 18g | Vitamin A: 368IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 20mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Baileys Coffee appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/baileys-irish-cream-with-coffee/feed/ 2
Fish Biryani https://properfoodie.com/fish-biryani/ https://properfoodie.com/fish-biryani/#respond Tue, 09 Apr 2019 17:14:55 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=9595 Lightly spiced fish biryani made with a yogurt biryani sauce and cooked in one pot with layered fish, rice and saffron. Served up with fresh coriander and yogurt dip topped with chilli flakes and oil Fish biryani recipe Biryani isn't really a curry - its a rice dish, a rice dish thats sealed in the...

Read More

The post Fish Biryani appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Lightly spiced fish biryani made with a yogurt biryani sauce and cooked in one pot with layered fish, rice and saffron. Served up with fresh coriander and yogurt dip topped with chilli flakes and oil

fish biryani with yogurt

Fish biryani recipe

Biryani isn't really a curry - its a rice dish, a rice dish thats sealed in the pan and then 'baked' on the stove. Theres no 'curry gravy' going on here. If you are looking for something a little more saucy then a Thai green curry, Thai red curry, Massaman curry, chicken tikka masala curry or chicken and almond curry should do the trick. For a veggie option I always, always opt for a warming and aromatic red lentil tarka dahl.

There is, however, a lovely, creamy, biryani marinade in this recipe. Its used to initially flavour the fish, but is then mostly soaked up into the rice during cooking. The meat for this dish goes in raw and traditionally the biryani recipe uses mutton. However, to keep this dish nice and light and easy to cook I've opted for cod. But any white chunky fish would work well here. I do love a good fish and rice dish and I'm always on the look out for anything that makes this combination a little more interesting. Like my fish kedgeree, haddock and rosemary risotto or giant wild rice salad with salmon and eggs.

Dum biryani

Biryani rice

To produce perfectly cooked rice in a biryani dish, the rice should be briefly cooked to al dente in a pan of simmering water, before transferring to the dum biryani (cooking pot). Traditional recipes and the recipe below use basmati rice, which should fluff up nicely at the end of the cooking process.

fish pot meal

Biryani spices

A mixture of Indian spices are used in a biryani. These include ground coriander, chilli powder and turmeric. The other main spice is biryani masala, however, in this recipe I have used garam masala, which is a more accessible spice. If you would prefer to use biryani masala you can prepare this yourself at home. Have a look at this biryani masala recipe for further details.

biryani with yogurt

What is Dum Biryani?

Traditionally dum biryani is the description of the cooking process. Dum means cooking on low and effectively baking the dish in a sealed container. In this recipe I have tried to replicate this process by cooking the fish biryani is a large pan with the lid on and over a low heat on the stove. The dish is cooked like this for 20 minutes, allowing the fish and rice to cook through until the fish flakes into pieces and the rice is fluffy.

biryani rice

How to make Fish Biryani

  1. In a large bowl mix together the ground coriander, chilli powder, garam masala powder, turmeric, and garlic ginger paste.biryani spices
  2. Next, add yogurt to the spice mix and combine together to form a pastebiryani sauce
  3. Add the fish to the biryani paste and coat well. Then set to one side and allow to marinade for at least 20 minutes.Coat boneless cod in Indian sauce
  4. Meanwhile fry off diced onions and sliced green chillies in a large pan. Cook until golden brown and just starting to char.fry cumin seeds, onion and green pepper
  5. Remove the onions from the heat and add the marinated fish and all the sauce. Add cod in sauce to fried onions
  6. Layer al dente rice (simmered in water for 3 minutes only) over the top of the fishLayer fish biryani with al dente rice
  7. Add lemon juice and saffron soaked in wateradd saffron water and lemon juice
  8. Place on the lid and cook on the stove on low for 20 minutes.dum biryani sealed with lid on and baked on the hob
  9. After 20 minutes remove the lid, mix well and garnish with chopped coriandertop with coriander and serve with yogurt

How do you keep biryani rice from sticking to the pan?

To stop the rice sticking to the bottom of the pan during cooking place the fish and marinade sauce in the bottom of the pan before the rice and make sure the base is fully covered. Diced tomatoes can also be added to the base along with the fish to fully ensure that the rice doesn't stick.

How long can you keep fish biryani in the fridge?

The biryani will keep well in the fridge for 48 hours. Ensure that the biryani is fully cooled before refrigerating.

Can you freeze and reheat rice dishes?

Yes rice dishes can be frozen and reheated, just ensure the rice is completely cooled before going in the freezer. When reheating make sure the rice is fully defrosted then, for best results add a splash of water and reheat in the microwave.

OTHER CURRY RECIPES:

For more recipe ideas for a cosy night in have a look at my romantic dinner recipes post.

1 hour to produceunder 500 kcal recipeHigh in protein recipegluten free recipepost workout mealbetter than takeaways recipe

📖 Recipe

Fish biryani
Print

Fish Biryani

Lightly spiced fish biryani made with a yogurt biryani sauce and cooked in one pot with layered fish, rice and saffron. The dish is served with fresh coriander and extra yogurt topped with chilli flakes and oil
Course Dinner, Main Course
Cuisine Indian
Prep Time 40 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 4 people
Calories 480.5kcal

Ingredients

For the rice:

  • 300 g Uncooked white basmati rice
  • 600 ml boiling water
  • Pinch of salt

For the biryani marinade:

  • ½ teaspoon ground coriander
  • 1 teaspoon hot chilli powder
  • 1 teaspoon Garam Masala
  • ½ teaspoon ground turmeric
  • 1 tablespoon Garlic ginger paste
  • 250 g whole plain natural yogurt
  • 600 g boneless and skinless cod fillets

For the biryani

  • ½ tablespoon oil
  • ½ teaspoon cumin seeds
  • 200 g Red onions finely chopped
  • 5 small green chillies chopped
  • A few Saffron strands
  • 1 juice of a lemon

To serve:

  • Fresh coriander
  • Extra yogurt
  • chilli flakes

Equipment:

  • Large bowl
  • Large pan for cooking rice
  • Large shallow pan with lid

Instructions

To make the rice

  • Add 300g of uncooked rice to a large pan the cover with approximately 600ml boiling water from the kettle. Add a pinch of salt then simmer on medium heat for 3 minutes. After 3 minutes drain and rinse under the cold tap to cool the grains and stop the cooking process. At this point the rice should be barely cooked (al dente). The rice will be fully cooked through later, for now, set to one side.

To make the biryani marinade:

  • In a large bowl mix together ½ teaspoon ground coriander, 1 teaspoon hot chilli powder, 1 teaspoon garam masala powder, ½ teaspoon ground turmeric, and 1 tablespoon garlic ginger paste.
    biryani spices
  • Next, add 250g whole plain yogurt to the spice mix and combine together to form a paste.
    Coat boneless fish in biryani sauce
  • Add the fish to the biryani paste and mix to coat well. Then set to one side and allow to marinade for at least 20 minutes.
    Coat boneless fish in biryani sauce

To make the biryani

  • Whilst the fish in marinating, fry off 200g diced red onions and 5 sliced green chillies in a large pan (one with a lid). Cook until golden brown and just starting to char. Remove the pan from the heat and add the marinated fish and all the sauce.
    fry cumin seeds onion and green pepper
  • Next layer the al dente rice over the top of the fish followed by a squeeze of lemon juice and saffron strands soaked in water for 2 minutes.
    add saffron water and lemon juice to biryani
  • Place the lid on the pan and cook on the stove on low for 20 minutes.
    dum biryani sealed with lid on and baked on the hob
  • After 20 minutes remove the lid, mix well and garnish with chopped coriander.
    top biryani with coriander and serve with yogurt
  • Serve with extra yogurt topped with oil and chilli flakes (optional)

Video

Nutrition

Serving: 354g | Calories: 480.5kcal | Carbohydrates: 73.1g | Protein: 37.4g | Fat: 6.9g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.8g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3.2g | Sodium: 240mg | Sugar: 8.3g

The post Fish Biryani appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/fish-biryani/feed/ 0
Green Bean Almondine https://properfoodie.com/green-bean-almondine/ https://properfoodie.com/green-bean-almondine/#respond Thu, 22 Aug 2019 12:21:09 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=10523 Meet your new favourite side dish. It sounds so fancy but it is such a simple recipe for green beans and almonds. Crisp green bean almondine is an easy side dish made extra special with the addition of buttery, pan fried almonds! You are going to love eating your greens with these delicious and crispy...

Read More

The post Green Bean Almondine appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Meet your new favourite side dish. It sounds so fancy but it is such a simple recipe for green beans and almonds. Crisp green bean almondine is an easy side dish made extra special with the addition of buttery, pan fried almonds! You are going to love eating your greens with these delicious and crispy green beans with almonds.

Green bean almondine

What is green bean almondine?

This recipe is a classic french dish and is simply green beans with almonds. The name has been adapted from the original French term of ‘amandine’ meaning 'a garnish of almonds’.

As nice and simple as all that sounds, in order to make this the best green bean recipe, there are a few extra additions that can really bring it to life. This mainly involves pan frying the almonds in butter and lemon juice. The lemon juice reduces into the butter and creates a sweet caramelised sauce. So delicious!

My own twist, which I really feel does make this the best green been almondine recipe ever, is the addition of freshly chopped dill. The subtle flavour of this unobtrusive herb partners so well with the sour lemon and creamy almonds.

green bean almondine with almond garnish

Green Bean Almondine Ingredients

To make this recipe you will need just 5 ingredients, plus a bit of seasoning. Keep in mind, fresh green beans are best for this recipe. They’re easy to prepare and deliciously crisp.

  • 200g Green Beans
  • 50g Butter
  • 50g flaked almonds
  • Juice of half a lemon
  • Fresh dill
  • salt and pepper

Green bean almondine in the pan

How to prepare the green beans

Preparing green beans is not a difficult task at all. Plus, fresh green beans are well worth it for their crisp texture and flavour. Follow these guidelines and you’ll be cooking fresh green beans for your green bean almondine in no time!

  1. How to trim green beans

    Trimming green beans needn’t be a hassle. The ends that need to go are the ones with the remaining stems (where the bean was attached to the plant). The thinner tapered end can stay – no trimming required.

    • Line the bean up so the stem ends are all together on the same side.
    • Use your hand to line up evenly then slice the stem tips off with a sharp knife.
  2. How to clean green beans

As with most veg, fruits and salads, green beans can be rinsed under cold tap water to ensure any debris and dirt has been washed away.

How to Make Green Bean Almondine

This green bean recipe is one of the easiest you’ll find. It takes just a few steps and is well worth the end result.

  1. The first important step in this recipe is how to boil green beans correctly so they stay crisp and bright green. Start by adding washed and trimmed green beans to a small pan. Add boiling water from the kettle and simmer on the stove for 2 minutes.add water to green beans and simmer
  2. After 2 minutes immediately drain the water and plunge the green beans into iced water to stop the cooking process and to help keep the green beans crisp and bright in colour.place blanched green beans in iced water to stop cooking process
  3. Next, place a frying pan on a medium heat and add 50g of butter. Once the butter has melted add the flaked almonds and toss together. Fry for 5 minutes, allowing the almonds to lightly brown.add flaked almond to butter
  4. Add a squeeze of lemon juice and then take off the heat. RECIPE NOTE: Adding the juice will cause the butter to simmer and reduce rapidly, this further browns the butter and almonds. Removing the pan from the heat prevents burning.squeeze over juice from half a lemon
  5. Drain the green beans from the iced water. Add to the pan and toss with the buttered almonds.add blanched green beans into the butter and almond mix
  6. Stir in some fresh dill and season. Then serve immediately.add fresh dill

Can I make green beans almondine ahead of time?

This recipe should ideally be served immediately from the pan. However, there are couple of preparatory steps you can undertake ahead of time. The initial blanching of the beans is finished by plunging the beans into iced water (see steps 1 and 2 above). Once the beans are fully cooled they can be transferred to a container and stored in the fridge for up to 24 hours or until needed.

The lemon and dill can be sliced and the butter and almonds can be weighed out and also all stored in the fridge.

When ready to serve, all that remains is melting the butter in the pan, cooking the almonds for 5 minutes and then adding the lemon juice, beans and dill.

green bean almondine side dish

What to Serve with Green Bean Almondine

The best thing about this recipe is that its a side dish that will go with almost any meal. Be it a simple roast chicken, a creamy chicken and leek recipe or foil pack salmon or even a Thai red curry, green bean almondine is a great side dish to have at the table.  This recipe also partners really well with other side dishes like foil pack potatoes or honey glazed carrots and parsnips. You could also pair it with slow cooker applesauce and any of the main dishes above.

For dessert, depending on the time of year, try this delicious Bakewell tart with raspberry jam, apple dump cake with fresh apples. pumpkin cobbler with spiced butter toffee, healthy banana bread with week old bananas, strawberry rhubarb crisp, or peach cobbler with cake mix.

Green bean almondine with buttery almonds

So next time you’re stuck for ideas on what to serve with dinner, why not give this fabulous side dish a try.

 Recipe low in carbshigh in nutrients recipegluten free recipe

📖 Recipe

green bean almondine
Print

Green bean almondine

Crisp green bean almondine, a simple side dish, which is made extra special by the addition of buttery, pan fried almonds and a sprinkling of dill. If there was ever a reason to start eating your greens - this surly must be it!
Course Appetizer, Side Dish, starter
Cuisine French
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 182.6kcal

Ingredients

  • 200 g Green Beans
  • 50 g Butter
  • 50 g flaked almonds
  • Juice of half a lemon
  • Fresh dill (Handful)
  • salt and pepper

Instructions

How to trim green beans

  • Trimming green beans needn't be a hassle. The ends that need to go are the ones with the remaining stems (where the bean was attached to the plant). The thinner tapered end can stay - no trimming required.
  • Line the bean up so the stem ends are all together on the same side, use your hand to line up evenly then slice the stem tips off with a sharp knife.

How to clean green beans

  • As with most veg, fruits and salads, green beans can be rinsed under cold tap water to ensure any debris and dirt has been washed away.

How to Make Green Bean Almondine

  • The first important step in this recipe is how to boil green beans correctly so they stay crisp and bright green. Start by adding washed and trimmed green beans to a small pan. Add boiling water from the kettle and simmer on the stove for 2 minutes.
    add water to green beans and simmer
  • After 2 minutes immediately drain the water and plunge the green beans into iced water to stop the cooking process and to help keep the green beans crisp and bright in colour.
    place blanched green beans in iced water to stop cooking process
  • Next, place a frying pan on a medium heat and add 50g of butter. Once the butter has melted add the flaked almonds and toss together. Fry for 5 minutes, allowing the almonds to lightly brown.
    add flaked almond to butter
  • Add a squeeze of lemon juice and then take off the heat. RECIPE NOTE: Adding the juice will cause the butter to simmer and reduce rapidly, this further browns the butter and almonds. Removing the pan from the heat prevents burning.
    squeeze over juice from half a lemon
  • Drain the green beans from the iced water. Add to the pan and toss with the buttered almonds. Stir in some fresh dill, season, and then serve immediately.
    add fresh dill

Video

Notes

Click here to see traffic light nutritional info for this recipe

Can I make green beans almondine ahead of time?

This recipe should ideally be served immediately from the pan. However, there are couple of preparatory steps you can undertake ahead of time. The initial blanching of the beans is finished by plunging the beans into iced water (see steps 1 and 2 above). Once the beans are fully cooled they can be transferred to a container and stored in the fridge for up to 24 hours or until needed.
The lemon and dill can be sliced and the butter and almonds can be weighed out and also all stored in the fridge.
When ready to serve, all that remains is melting the butter in the pan, cooking the almonds for 5 minutes and then adding the lemon juice, beans and dill.

What to Serve with Green Bean Almondine

The best thing about this recipe is that its a side dish that will go with almost any meal. Be it a creamy chicken and leek recipe or foil pack salmon or even a Thai red curry, green bean almondine is a great side dish to have at the table.  This recipe also partners really well with other side dishes like foil pack potatoes or honey glazed carrots and parsnips. You could also pair it with slow cooker applesauce and any of the main dishes above.

Nutrition

Serving: 82g | Calories: 182.6kcal | Carbohydrates: 2.6g | Protein: 3.9g | Fat: 17.5g | Saturated Fat: 7.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1.8g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7.4g | Sodium: 200mg | Fiber: 1.7g | Sugar: 1.8g

This recipe was inspired by a recipe from Family Foodie. I first shared this Green bean almondine recipe on the Sunday Supper Movement site, where I am a contributor.

PIN FOR LATER

Crisp green bean almondine, a simple side dish, which is made extra special by the addition of buttery, pan fried almonds and a sprinkling of dill. If there was ever a reason to start eating your greens – this surely must be it!

The post Green Bean Almondine appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/green-bean-almondine/feed/ 0
Cauliflower soup https://properfoodie.com/cauliflower-soup/ https://properfoodie.com/cauliflower-soup/#respond Fri, 15 Nov 2019 14:40:54 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=11419 Creamy cauliflower soup is the perfect healthy recipe for when you need a quick nutritious meal and a helping of something that's warm and comforting. This cauliflower soup recipe has no stodgy ingredients or full fat cream but still provides rich and creamy flavours from its caramelised shallots and fluffy cauliflower. Its made with just...

Read More

The post Cauliflower soup appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Creamy cauliflower soup is the perfect healthy recipe for when you need a quick nutritious meal and a helping of something that's warm and comforting. This cauliflower soup recipe has no stodgy ingredients or full fat cream but still provides rich and creamy flavours from its caramelised shallots and fluffy cauliflower. Its made with just a few simple and healthy ingredients and can be on the table in under 30 minutes.

Cauliflower soup recipe

Can you make this recipe without cream?

Although most soups will benefit tremendously from a big dollop of cream, cauliflower soup is one of those recipes that can manage a velvety, creamy finish all on its own. Admittedly, there is some semi skimmed that goes into this soup recipe, but the rest of that delicious, creaminess is from the cauliflower itself. Give it 20 minutes to simmer in some stock, or 15 minutes to roast in the oven and the soft, fluffy florets will blitz down into an irresistibly, creamy soup in a matter of seconds.

 

Whether you use roasted cauliflower of cauliflower boiled in veggie stock, the results will always be the same - full flavoured and velvety smooth. However, see the end of this post if you are looking to make a cream of cauliflower soup recipe.

healthy cauliflower soup recipe

Ingredients for cauliflower soup

This easy soup recipe requires just a few simple ingredients, many of which I already had at home:

  • ½ tablespoon Olive oil
  • 1 clove garlic finely chopped
  • 3 large banana shallots (or 6 small) (150g) roughly diced
  • 1 medium cauliflower (600g) leaves removed and chopped into small florets
  • ½ teaspoon ground nutmeg
  • 450ml vegetable stock
  • 300ml semi skimmed milk
  • Seasoning
easy cauliflower soup

How to make cauliflower soup

  1. Heat the oil in a large saucepan. Add a clove of finely chopped garlic and 150g of roughly chopped shallots. Fry gently until soft.
  2. Recipe tip: for extra flavour, fry the shallots in the pan until caramelisedfrying chopped garlic and shallots in oil
  3. Next, add the cauliflower florets and half a teaspoon of ground nutmeg.adding cauliflower florets to the fried shallots
  4. Then pour in 450ml of veg stock and 300ml of semi skimmed milk. adding stock to the pan adding semi skimmed milk to the pan
  5. Gently bring the soup to the boil and then cover and simmer for 20 minutes or until cauliflower is soft. soup brought to the boil and covered with a lid
  6. Transfer the contents of the pan to a processor and blend until smooth.
  7. Recipe tip: Add the chunky parts of the soup to the processor first and gradually add the liquid as you blend.
  8. Add more liquid to thin out and reach your desired consistency. cooked soup transferred to a food processor soup blended until smooth
  9. Return the soup to the pan to reheat if necessary, then taste and season.
  10. Recipe tip: For a super smooth soup blend for an extra 2 minutes and then pass soup through a sieve.soup served and seasoned
  11. Serve in bowls with crusty bread.

Different types of cauliflower soup

This recipe is the most basic of soup recipes and is pretty damn good just as it is. However, cauliflower is a versatile vegetable and so if you're looking for a soup with a bit more punch, why not try one of the options below:

How to make cauliflower cheese soup

For cauliflower cheese soup follow the recipe above and after blending return the soup to the pan. Gently reheat the soup and add 50g of grated cheddar (or your preferred hard cheese. Stir well until the cheese has fully melted. For an extra kick stir in a teaspoon of mustard or serve with a dash of Worcestershire sauce.

How to make this soup spicy

Cauliflower is a great vegetable for taking on other flavours and will soak up spices like a sponge. To make a spicy or curry-flavoured cauliflower soup follow the recipe above but coat the cauliflower with spices before adding to the pan. For a spicy kick first coat the uncooked cauliflower florets in half tablespoon oil then mix: 1 teaspoon paprika, ½ teaspoon cayenne pepper, and ½ teaspoon hot chilli powder. For something a little milder with more of a curry flavour, mix with: 1 teaspoon ground cumin, 1 teaspoon curry powder, ½ teaspoon turmeric and 1 teaspoon ground coriander.

Curried soup is great served with freshly baked naan bread. Its also ideal for bulking out with moroccan ingredients like chickpeas: spiced cauliflower and chickpea soup.

How to make vegan cauliflower soup

To make this recipe vegan, simply replace the milk with plant milk (i.e. - almond milk) or remove the milk completely and replace with extra vegetable stock.

How to make roasted cauliflower soup

Roasted cauliflower gives this soup and extra layer of smokey, nutty flavours, which is especially good combined with the melted cheese or curry spices from the above ideas. Simply coat the raw cauliflower florets in oil (and spices if you like) then roast on a tray in the oven for 15-20 minutes or until the edges are just starting to char. Then continue with the recipe above, the only difference being that you will only need to simmer the soup for 10 minutes, rather than 20 minutes, before blending.

Roasted cauliflower is also fantastic in a roasted cauliflower salad.

creamy cauliflower soup

How to make this recipe super creamy

This recipe is one thats creamy all on its own. The mild flavour and soft texture of the cauliflower means that a quick blitz in the blender will give a lusciously creamy result every time. However, if you are looking for extra creaminess or even wanting to call your soup 'cream of cauliflower' then you may want to add in a little cream.

To make this soup a cream of cauliflower recipe simply return your soup to the pan after blending and gently reheat. Once its piping hot remove from the heat and stir in 150ml of double cream, then serve. Alternatively you could stir in 3 tablespoon of soured cream (particularly good if you've made the spicy or curried cauliflower soup), or replace the milk in this recipe with a can of coconut milk for a creamy cauliflower and coconut soup - delicious.

Cauliflower soup without cream

Can you freeze this recipe?

This soup recipe can be frozen for up to 3 months. Once your soup is fully cooled transfer to sealable containers and pop into the freezer. Defrost thoroughly before reheating, either on the side for a few hours or in the microwave for 5 - 10 minutes with lid removed. Then gently reheat in a pan until the soup just about boils.

Other homemade soup recipes to try:

📖 Recipe

cauliflower soup
Print

Cauliflower Soup

Creamy cauliflower soup is the perfect healthy recipe for when you need a quick nutritious meal and a helping of something that's warm and comforting. This cauliflower soup recipe has no stodgy ingredients or full fat cream but still provides rich and creamy flavours from its caramelised shallots and fluffy cauliflower. Its made with just a few simple and healthy ingredients and can be on the table in under 30 minutes.
Course Appetizer, starter or main
Cuisine British
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 114.7kcal

Equipment

  • Large saucepan
  • Food processor or hand blender

Ingredients

  • ½ tablespoon Olive oil
  • 1 clove garlic finely chopped
  • 3 large banana shallots or 6 small (150g) roughly diced
  • 1 medium cauliflower 600g leaves removed and chopped into small florets
  • ½ teaspoon ground nutmeg
  • 450 ml vegetable stock
  • 300 ml semi skimmed milk
  • Seasoning and crusty bread to serve

Instructions

  • Heat the oil in a large saucepan. Add a clove of finely chopped garlic and 150g of roughly chopped shallots. Fry gently until soft.
  • Recipe tip: for extra flavour, fry the shallots in the pan until caramelised
    frying chopped garlic and shallots in oil
  • Next, add the cauliflower florets and half a teaspoon of ground nutmeg.
    adding ground nutmeg to the soup pan
  • Then pour in 450ml of veg stock and 300ml of semi skimmed milk.
    adding semi skimmed milk to the pan
  • Gently bring the soup to the boil and then cover and simmer for 20 minutes or until cauliflower is soft.
    soup brought to the boil and covered with a lid
  • Transfer the contents of the pan to a processor and blend until smooth.
    cooked soup transferred to a food processor
  • Recipe tip: Add the chunky parts of the soup to the processor first and gradually add the liquid as you blend. Add more liquid to thin out the soup and stop when you reach your desired consistency.
    soup blended until smooth
  • Return the soup to the pan to reheat if necessary, then taste and season.
    soup served and seasoned
  • Recipe tip: For a super smooth soup blend for an extra 2 minutes and then pass soup through a sieve.
  • Serve in bowls with crusty bread.

Video

Notes

How to make cauliflower cheese soup

For cauliflower cheese soup follow the recipe above and after blending return the soup to the pan. Gently reheat the soup and add 50g of grated cheddar (or your preferred hard cheese. Stir well until the cheese has fully melted. For an extra kick stir in a teaspoon of mustard or serve with a dash of Worcestershire sauce.

How to make spicy cauliflower soup

Cauliflower is a great vegetable for taking on other flavours and will soak up spices like a sponge. To make a spicy or curry-flavoured cauliflower soup follow the recipe above but coat the cauliflower with spices before adding to the pan. For a spicy kick first coat the uncooked cauliflower florets in half tablespoon oil then mix: 1 teaspoon paprika, ½ teaspoon cayenne pepper, and ½ teaspoon hot chilli powder. For something a little milder with more of a curry flavour, mix with: 1 teaspoon ground cumin, 1 teaspoon curry powder, ½ teaspoon turmeric and 1 teaspoon ground coriander. Curried cauliflower soup is great served with freshly baked naan bread. Its also ideal for bulking out with moroccan ingredients like chickpeas: spiced cauliflower and chickpea soup.

How to make vegan cauliflower soup

To make this recipe vegan, simply replace the milk with plant milk (i.e. - almond milk) or remove the milk completely and replace with extra vegetable stock.

How to make roasted cauliflower soup

To make roasted cauliflower soup, simply coat the raw cauliflower florets in oil (and spices if you like) then roast on a tray in the oven for 15-20 minutes or until the edges are just starting to char. Then continue with the recipe above, the only difference being that you will only need to simmer the soup for 10 minutes, rather than 20 minutes, before blending.

How to make cauliflower soup creamy

To make cream of cauliflower soup simply return your soup to the pan after blending and gently reheat. Once its piping hot remove from the heat and stir in 150ml of double cream, then serve. Alternatively you could stir in 3 tablespoon of soured cream (particularly good if you've made the spicy or curried cauliflower soup), or replace the milk in this recipe with a can of coconut milk for a creamy cauliflower and coconut soup - delicious.

Can you freeze cauliflower soup?

Cauliflower soup can be frozen for up to 3 months. Once your soup is fully cooled transfer to sealable containers and pop into the freezer. Defrost thoroughly before reheating, either on the side for a few hours or in the microwave for 5 - 10 minutes with lid removed. Then gently reheat in a pan until the soup just about boils.
Nutritional info cauliflower soup

Nutrition

Serving: 378g | Calories: 114.7kcal | Carbohydrates: 11.7g | Protein: 9.6g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 1.5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.5g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1.5g | Sodium: 280mg | Fiber: 3.2g | Sugar: 9.5g

PIN FOR LATER

Creamy cauliflower soup recipe

The post Cauliflower soup appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/cauliflower-soup/feed/ 0
Meat and leek pies with aubergine pastry https://properfoodie.com/meat-leek-pies-aubergine-pastry/ https://properfoodie.com/meat-leek-pies-aubergine-pastry/#comments Mon, 06 Feb 2017 12:15:05 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=3362  A meat and leek pie that is so tasty and yet amazingly healthy. These little pies taste just like a normal meat pie encased in a thin, soft pastry. . . but . . . there isn't actually any pastry involved in this recipe at all!  It might seem a little odd to replace pastry...

Read More

The post Meat and leek pies with aubergine pastry appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
 A meat and leek pie that is so tasty and yet amazingly healthy. These little pies taste just like a normal meat pie encased in a thin, soft pastry. . . but . . . there isn't actually any pastry involved in this recipe at all! 

aubergine pie with mince meat and leek filling

It might seem a little odd to replace pastry with . . . wait for it and please don't leave . . .

aubergine! 🙂

Come back!

Trust me when you try it you'll realise that not only is it lower in fat and calories, but as far as a tasty, pastry alternative goes, this is most definitely the way forward, even if you're not on a diet.

Like a lot of my recipes the inspiration for this dish comes from Italy!

Italy really is a magical, foodie paradise and I'm sure it will be bringing me new and inspired recipes for the rest of my life. However, this particular recipe will always hold a special place in my heart (and belly).

I had my first alfresco, aubergine pie in a little Tuscan restaurant on the hilltop village of Pienza. Ben and I sat on a little table, at the edge of the restaurant gardens, overlooking the beautiful rolling hills, cypress trees and vineyards of Italy. It really was picture perfect. If you ever find yourself in Tuscany, and you haven't been to Pienza, then I would strongly recommend a visit there and to the quaint, traditional Terrazza Val D'orcia restaurant.

Pienza Tuscany

Aubergine pie in Tuscany

Whats particularly special and memorable about this restaurant and dish, is that a year after these pictures were taken, we found ourselves back in the very same spot, ordering the very same meal and making another very special memory.

This is where we got engaged.

It was early on in the evening and so we briefly had the restaurant gardens to ourselves. I sat patiently waiting for my Tuscan pie and sipped on a deep red, plummy wine whilst taking in the incredible view. I had no idea that Ben was about to pull out the most beautiful ring and ask if I would be his wife.

Pienza restaurant pre engagement

Debbie and Ben engegement

the ring and the pie

It was and will always be one of the most special moments of my life

I couldn't have asked for a more perfect proposal and probably wouldn't have been able to dream up something so incredible if I'd been able to plan it myself. However, with all the excitement of getting engaged to my best friend and soul mate, I completely lost my appetite. Never - been - known!

And so a pathetic attempt was made by both me and Ben to eat this wonderful pie, but in the end we both gave up and decided to stick to the wine.

So it only seems right that I should recreate the aubergine pie at home. Its taken me long enough but I thought it was essential that I got this made, eaten, and up on the blog before we return to Italy for our wedding in August this year. And I'm actually extremely pleased with the way my version of the aubergine pie turned out.

Read here about our amazing Veneto wedding the incredible Amarone risotto we had as a starter for our wedding breakfast.

aubergine pie

So how did I go about recreating this pie?

First off, as with most aubergine recipes, its essential to prepare the aubergine properly before hand. This requires salt, kitchen towels and a couple of heavy books. Salting freshly cut aubergine helps to remove any excess water and any bitter taste along with it. As I was making pies, and the aubergine was to be the pastry, I wanted to remove as much of the water and bitterness as possible.

Salting aubergine for the removal of excess water and bitterness

So firstly, slice the aubergine length ways into strips (around 3-4mm thick). Lay the sliced aubergine side by side on a cooling rack, place over a tray, and then scatter a pinch of sea salt over each piece.

Salting aubergine

Then cover with sheets of kitchen towel:

aubergine salted

and place a couple of heavy cook books over the top of this. It might be useful to place a sheet of foil or cling film between the kitchen towel and the books, as a lot of water does drain off and my books did get a little wet.

cookbooks and salted aubergines

Leave the aubergine like this for a good couple of hours and let the salt and the compression of the books squeeze away all the water.

After 2 hours or so, remove the books and kitchen towel. Briefly rinse the aubergine slices to remove the salt and then pat dry.

Next separate the slices into sets of four, trying to ensure different sized slices are spread evenly between groups. Each set of 4 is used to line a small, round, tin mould (approx. 3 inch diameter moulds). Drizzle olive oil inside each mould before adding the aubergine, this will prevent sticking during baking.

I used one slice to line the base of the mould and then the other slices were just used to line the sides - this was to stop a thicker layer of aubergine being created on the bottom.

line tins with aubergine slices

Next make up the filling of fried mince beef, chopped onions and chopped leeks. Then add this to each mould. Ensure that the filling is pressed well into each mould, so you can fit in as much as possible. The last thing you want is for there to be big gaps of empty space in your pie.

add filling to aubergine lining

Then fold over the flaps of aubergine, cutting down to size if required:

cut down aubergine to fit

Secure with cocktail sticks:

secure aubergine with cocktail sticks

Then Bake and voila.....amazing aubergine pies!!

Easy!! . . . Ok so it isn't a quick recipe, and definitely one I'd consider bookmarking for a weekend. This is not a 15 minute, Jamie Oliver style, mid week meal. But it is a spectacular, spend an afternoon in the kitchen, and feel ever so chuffed with your creation afterwards meal.

I served up these beauts with some freshly roasted beetroot and a homemade horseradish and yogurt sauce. The pies were finished with a passata sauce and grated parmesan, and the horseradish sauce was garnished with chopped chives. Truly a masterpiece .......thank you  Terrazza Val D'orcia for your wonderful aubergine dish and for helping make our engagement so special.

Nutritional information for this recipe >>

**Estimated nutritional information per individual pie with passata and cheese topping and 100g of pie. If you want to find out more about how the information is calculated and the sources used, please refer to my Nutrition Information Guide.

📖 Recipe

aubergine pie with mince meat and leek filling
Print

Meat and leek pies with aubergine pastry

Aubergine pie - Meat and leek pie with aubergine pastry topped with passata and parmesan served with roasted beetroot and horseradish sauce.
Prep Time 3 hours
Cook Time 30 minutes
Calories 266kcal

Ingredients

For the pie filling

  • ½ tablespoon olive oil
  • 300 g onion finely chopped
  • 100 g leeks finely chopped
  • 400 g extra lean mince meat
  • 1 bay leaf
  • ½ teaspoon oregano
  • Salt and pepper to season

For the pie casing

  • 3 medium aubergines around 250g each
  • A good amound of sea salt for dehydrating the aubergine
  • Olive oil to drizzle on the inside of pie moulds

for the toppings and garnishes

  • 3 small pieces of raw beetroot peeled (use gloves)
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • A squeeze of runny honey
  • 200 g passata
  • 20 g grated parmesan
  • 4 tablespoon Greek style fat free yogurt
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon horseradish sauce
  • pinch of salt and black pepper
  • Chopped chives and lettuce leaves if desired

Equipment

  • Cooling rack and tray for draining the aubergine
  • Plenty of kitchen towel
  • Heavy cooking books
  • Pie/dessert moulds approx. 3 inch diameter
  • Cocktail sticks

Instructions

for the pie

  • Preheat the oven to 180 degrees C
  • Prepare the aubergine as per the instructions in the above post, including lining the pie moulds with the aubergine.
  • Prepare the filling by heating ½ tablespoon oil in a large pan, add the onion and leek and gently fry until soft. Then add the mince meat, bay leaf and oregano. Fry until the meat is browned throughout. (Only use half a tablespoon of oil, so to keep the filling as dry as possible).
  • Drain the filling into a sieve, lined with kitchen towels. Its important to ensure that the filling is well drained to prevent the pies from being too soggy. at the same time find and remove the bay leaf.
  • Add the filling to the lined moulds - see images above. Push the filling down with the back of the spoon in order to fit in as much as possible.
  • Fold the aubergine slices over the top of the filling, trimming where necessary with scissors. Secure with cocktail sticks.
  • Place the pies onto a baking tray and bake in the oven for 30 minutes.

for the toppings and garnishes

  • Whilst the pies are baking, the beetroot and horseradish sauce can be prepared. Cut each piece of peeled beetroot into 1-2cm chunks. Place on a baking tray, drizzle with oil and honey, then pop in the oven for 20 minutes - both the beetroot and pies should be ready at a similar time.
  • Next place the passata in a small sauce pan and gently heat, once boiled, set to one side and allow to cool. This will allow any excess water to evaporate so there won't be any runny juices when serving.

For the horseradish sauce

  • In a small bowl add the yogurt, olive oil, horseradish, and salt and pepper. Then mix well and taste. Add more horseradish, seasoning or yogurt if required. Set to one side ready for serving.

Assembling the dish.

  • Once the pies and beetroot are cooked remove from the oven. Set the pies to one side to cool slightly for 5 minutes, before attempting to remove from their containers.
  • Whilst waiting for the pies to cool; arrange the lettuce leaves and cooked beetroot on the serving plates. carefully spoon blobs of the horseradish and yogurt sauce on or next to the beetroot and sprinkle over the chives.
  • Next return to your pies and run a sharp knife around the egde of the moulds in order to release the aubergine. Place a spatula over the top of the mould, then turn upside down and gently allow the pie to slide out. You may want to place kitchen towel under your spatula just in case any excess juices spill out.
  • Transfer the pie to the serving plate - repeat for each pie.
  • Spoon passata over each pie and finish with grated parmesan.

Nutrition

Serving: 420g | Calories: 266kcal | Fat: 10.8g

The post Meat and leek pies with aubergine pastry appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/meat-leek-pies-aubergine-pastry/feed/ 8
Pear Chutney https://properfoodie.com/spiced-pear-cider-christmas-chutney/ https://properfoodie.com/spiced-pear-cider-christmas-chutney/#comments Mon, 10 Jan 2022 23:54:29 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=5424 Homemade spiced pear chutney recipe made with fresh pears and apple cider, flavoured with ground spices and cinnamon. A simple and delicious chutney that can be made and jarred in under an hour. Use with cheese and biscuits, serve up with roast chicken or pork casserole or why not save for using as a Christmas...

Read More

The post Pear Chutney appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Homemade spiced pear chutney recipe made with fresh pears and apple cider, flavoured with ground spices and cinnamon. A simple and delicious chutney that can be made and jarred in under an hour. Use with cheese and biscuits, serve up with roast chicken or pork casserole or why not save for using as a Christmas chutney or for a lovely foodie gift.

Homemade pear chutney in a small jar with the lid off and a spoonful of chutney to the side.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Please note that this post contains affiliate links, which means if you click the link and then go on to purchase, I will receive a percentage of the cost. See my privacy policy and disclosure statement for further details.

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

Brown sugar and ginger spiced pears, poached in cider and reduced to a sweet and spicy chutney. Your cheese and biscuits is crying out for this recipe! This easy homemade chutney recipe is also great for using up a glut of pears or generally making use of and preserving some lovely autumnal fruit. It also makes for a pretty good foodie gift or Christmas present, just preserve in jars and add some tags.

🥘 Ingredients

This recipe makes 10 small jars (110ml/4fl oz) or 6 large jars (225ml/8fl oz) of chutney. To make this spiced pear chutney you will need:

Ingredients to make homemade pear chutney.

Ingredient notes

Measurements: For the amounts required, see the recipe card below and use the toggle button to see the recipe in cups.

Pears: This recipe uses conference pears but any variety of pear will work well in this chutney.

Apples: This recipe uses red eating apples, which keep their shape better than baking apples so results in a chunky textures chutney.

Vinegar: Use a vinegar with at least 5% acetic acid. This will ensure proper preserving of the chutney and prevent spoilage.

Demerara sugar: Sugar of course helps to sweeten the chutney but its also an important part of the preserving process, so don't leave it out.

Cider: Cider gives a fantastic flavour to this pear chutney, however if you'd prefer an alcohol free version just replace the cider with apple juice.

Mixed Spice: This is a ground spice mixture of cinnamon, coriander, caraway seeds, nutmeg, ginger and cloves. For a simple substitute use ½ teaspoon cinnamon and ½ teaspoon nutmeg.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Add chopped shallots to a large pan with a little oil and fry gently until soft.
  2. Next add the chopped pears, apples and ginger to the pan and mix together.
  3. Then add the cider, vinegar, lemon juice, sugar, mixed spice and cinnamon stick. Stir well and bring to the boil.
  4. Simmer for 30 minutes, check and stir occasionally.4 step by step images showing how to make pear chutney for steps 1-4.
  5. After 30 minutes or so, the chutney should have started to thicken. Use a masher to help mush down any larger pieces of apple or pear. Continue to simmer, allowing the liquid to reduce, until you are happy with the consistency.
  6. Transfer the hot pear chutney to sterilised jars. Screw the lids on right away so a tight vacuum seal will form as the sauce cools.2 step by step images showing how to make pear chutney for steps 5-6.
  7. If you plan to eat the chutney that day or week then once the sauce has cooled, transfer to a dish or container, cover and keep the fridge until needed.

💭 Expert tips

  • To test the consistency: Spoon some of the chutney onto a small plate and refrigerate for 5 minutes. If you are happy with the thickness of the cooled chutney you can remove the pan from the heat. If not, continue to simmer if too thin, or add more cider/apple juice if too thick.
  • Handling hot sterilised jars: For ease, use rubber gloves for handling hot jars and to ensure a tight grip when screwing on the lids.

❓ Frequently asked questions

How do you sterilise jars?

To sterilise the jars wash them thoroughly in soapy hot water, then rinse and place on a baking tray in the oven for 5 minutes at 150°C/300°F (until dry). Alternatively, put them through the dishwasher.

How to seal the jars?

Place hot pear chutney in hot sterilised jars (use a jam funnel for ease) and seal immediately by screwing on the lid. As the chutney cools a vacuum will form, pulling the lid in nice and tight.

How to store?

You can check the seal of the jars by pressing on the lid to make sure it doesn’t depress any further. Jars of pear chutney can then be stored in the cupboard for up to 6 months. If the lid does depress and a seal hasn’t formed you will need to use a water bath to ensure proper processing or alternatively store in the fridge for 4-6 weeks. Once opened, after proper sealing, refrigerate and eat within 1 month.

What makes chutney a chutney?

Chutney is usually fruits or vegetables preserved in vinegar and sugar.

Which vinegar is best for chutney?

Any vinegar will work well in chutney as long as its contains at least 5% acetic acid, which will kill any bacteria and allow the chutney to be preserved without spoilage. The type of 5% vinegar you choose will be down to taste. For a lighter taste opt for white wine vinegar, for something stronger and sweeter choose an aged balsamic vinegar.

A small jar filled with homemade chutney with a larger jar of chutney in the background.

Other Christmas recipe ideas

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Homemade pear chutney in a small jar with the lid off and a spoonful of chutney to the side.
Print

Pear Chutney

Homemade spiced pear chutney recipe made with fresh pears and apple cider, flavoured with ground spices and cinnamon. A simple and delicious chutney that can be made and jarred in under an hour. Use with cheese and biscuits, serve up with roast chicken or pork casserole or why not save for using as a Christmas chutney or for a lovely foodie gift.
Course Christmas, condiment, Side Dish
Cuisine British, Christmas
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 10 110ml jars
Calories 200kcal

Equipment

  • Masher
  • Jam funnel (for transferring chutney to jars)
  • Jars (for storage)

Ingredients

  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 4 medium Echalion shallots finely chopped - 300g
  • 3 large conference pears peeled and chopped into 2cm chunks - 650g
  • 2 red Gala apples cored and chopped into 1cm pieces with skins left on - 180g
  • 2 cm piece fresh ginger peeled and finely chopped
  • 350 ml apple cider
  • 75 ml white wine vinegar 5% acetic acid
  • ½ a lemon juiced
  • 250 g demerara sugar
  • 1 teaspoon mixed spice
  • 1 cinnamon stick

Instructions

  • Add chopped shallots to a large pan with a little oil and fry gently until soft.
    1 tablespoon olive oil, 4 medium Echalion shallots
  • Next add the chopped pears, apples and ginger to the pan and mix together.
    3 large conference pears, 2 red Gala apples, 2 cm piece fresh ginger
  • Then add the cider, vinegar, lemon juice, sugar, mixed spice and cinnamon stick. Stir well and bring to the boil
    350 ml apple cider, 75 ml white wine vinegar, ½ a lemon juiced, 250 g demerara sugar, 1 teaspoon mixed spice, 1 cinnamon stick
  • Simmer for 30 minutes, check and stir occasionally
  • After 30 minutes or so, the chutney should have started to thicken. Use a masher to help mush down any larger pieces of apple or pear. Continue to simmer, allowing the liquid to reduce, until you are happy with the consistency.
  • Transfer the hot pear chutney to sterilised jars. Screw the lids on right away so a tight vacuum seal will form as the sauce cools.
  • If you plan to eat the chutney that day or week then once the sauce has cooled, transfer to a dish or container, cover and keep the fridge until needed.

Notes

Pears: This recipe uses conference pears but any variety of pear will work well in this chutney.
Apples: This recipe uses red eating apples, which keep their shape better than baking apples so results in a chunky textures chutney.
Vinegar: Use a vinegar with at least 5% acetic acid. This will ensure proper preserving of the chutney and prevent spoilage.
Demerara sugar: Sugar of course helps to sweeten the chutney but its also an important part of the preserving process, so don't leave it out.
Cider: Cider gives a fantastic flavour to this pear chutney, however if you'd prefer an alcohol free version just replace the cider with apple juice.
Mixed Spice: This is a ground spice mixture of cinnamon, coriander, caraway seeds, nutmeg, ginger and cloves. For a simple substitute use ½ teaspoon cinnamon and ½ teaspoon nutmeg.
What makes chutney a chutney? Chutney is usually fruits or vegetables preserved in vinegar and sugar.
Which vinegar is best for chutney? Any vinegar will work well in chutney as long as its contains at least 5% acetic acid, which will kill any bacteria and allow the chutney to be preserved without spoilage. The type of 5% vinegar you choose will be down to taste. For a lighter taste opt for white wine vinegar, for something stronger and sweeter choose an aged balsamic vinegar.
To test the consistency: Spoon some of the chutney onto a small plate and refrigerate for 5 minutes. If you are happy with the thickness of the cooled chutney you can remove the pan from the heat. If not, continue to simmer if too thin, or add more cider/apple juice if too thick.
Handling hot sterilised jars: For ease, use rubber gloves for handling hot jars and to ensure a tight grip when screwing on the lids.
How do you sterilise jars? To sterilise the jars wash them thoroughly in soapy hot water, then rinse and place on a baking tray in the oven for 5 minutes at 150°C/300°F (until dry). Alternatively, put them through the dishwasher.
How to seal the jars? Place hot pear chutney in hot sterilised jars (use a jam funnel for ease) and seal immediately by screwing on the lid. As the chutney cools a vacuum will form, pulling the lid in nice and tight.
How to store? You can check the seal of the jars by pressing on the lid to make sure it doesn’t depress any further. Jars of pear chutney can then be stored in the cupboard for up to 6 months. If the lid does depress and a seal hasn’t formed you will need to use a water bath to ensure proper processing or alternatively store in the fridge for 4-6 weeks. Once opened, after proper sealing, refrigerate and eat within 1 month.

Nutrition

Serving: 110ml jar | Calories: 200kcal | Carbohydrates: 47g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 2g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 7mg | Potassium: 248mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 39g | Vitamin A: 29IU | Vitamin C: 7mg | Calcium: 29mg | Iron: 1mg

This post was first published in Dec 2017. Updated in Jan 2022 with new images, step by step instructions and expert tips.

The post Pear Chutney appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/spiced-pear-cider-christmas-chutney/feed/ 16
Fig and Apple Chutney with balsamic vinegar https://properfoodie.com/fig-apple-balsamic-chutney/ https://properfoodie.com/fig-apple-balsamic-chutney/#comments Fri, 09 Dec 2016 18:18:28 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=3045 A deliciously sweet fig chutney with crunchy seeds and sticky balsamic, which makes for the perfect chutney for cheese and biscuits. A great homemade chutney for Christmas and also one of my favourite homemade gifts to give out to friends and family. Find out how to make this lovely apple chutney and get my top...

Read More

The post Fig and Apple Chutney with balsamic vinegar appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
A deliciously sweet fig chutney with crunchy seeds and sticky balsamic, which makes for the perfect chutney for cheese and biscuits. A great homemade chutney for Christmas and also one of my favourite homemade gifts to give out to friends and family. Find out how to make this lovely apple chutney and get my top tips for handling and sealing sterilised jars.

Featured ad for Marigold

fig and apple chutney with cheese

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Theres something so sophisticated and decadent about dotting cheese and biscuits with a good dollop of chutney. The best chutney is sweet and tangy all at the same time, which helps to cut through the strong cheese. Figs and balsamic lend themselves perfectly to this task. The seedy figs and dark vinegar also create a chutney with a stunning, deep purple colour and a slight crunch as you bite through it. Delicious.

Figs, by the way, also do exceedingly well in a sweet and sticky homemade fig jam. Or if you're after a different flavoured chutney try my spiced pear and cider chutney.

Fig, apple and balsamic chutney in a bowl

🍽 What equipment do I need?

I usually use the small (110ml/4oz) jars and this fig chutney recipe fills about 10 of these. If you have larger jars (225ml/8oz) this chutney recipe will fill around 6 of these.

🥘 Ingredients

Full ingredients & instructions in recipe card below: Jump to Recipe Card

Preparing the ingredients for the recipe is pretty straight forward. Its mainly a lot of chopping before everything is piled into one pan and simmered for around 30 minutes. To make 10 small jars or 6 large jars of fig chutney you will need the following:

  • 350g red onions chopped
  • 500g red apples cored and roughly chopped
  • 1 tbsp olive oil
  • 550g large figs stems removed and cut into eighths
  • 2 tsp mixed spice
  • 350g muscovado sugar
  • ½ tsp nutmeg
  • ½ tsp cinnamon
  • 150ml red wine vinegar (with acetic acid content of at least 5%)
  • 250ml balsamic vinegar (with acetic acid content of at least 5%)

Note: I usually leave the skin on the apples as its easier and quicker and means that theres still chunks of apple in the finished chutney. With the skin off the apple would break up and spread throughout the chutney. So it just depends on your taste and if you would prefer chunky chutney (skin on) or smoother chutney (skin off)

♨️ Sterilising jars

To sterilise my jars I usually wash them thoroughly in soapy hot water, then rinse and place on a baking tray in the oven for 5 minutes at 150°C/300°F (until dry). You can also put them through the dishwasher.

🔪 Instructions

To make the fig chutney:

  1. In a large pan heat the oil. Add the onions and gently cook until soft and slightly caramelised.chopping onions with a non slip board
  2. Next add the chopped apples and figs. Sprinkle over the sugar and stir together well to dissolve the sugar.Slicing figs
  3. Then add 2 teaspoon mixed spice, ½ teaspoon nutmeg, ½ teaspoon cinnamon, 150ml red wine vinegar and 250ml balsamic vinegar. Stir well.chopped figs and apples cooking in a large pan
  4. Bring everything the boil and then turn down the heat and simmer for 30-45 minutes. Check and stir occasionally.
  5. After 30 minutes or so use a masher to break up some of the large bits. Continue to simmer until you are happy with the consistency.

If serving immediately:

  1. Transfer to a bowl and chill if desired.

If storing in jars:

  1. Sterilise your clean jars either in the dishwasher or in the oven for 5 minutes at 150°C/300°F.
  2. Transfer chutney into your jars whilst it is still hot and screw on the lids tightly (use a jam funnel for ease). A vacuum seal will form as the chutney cools. Tip: Use Marigold gloves to help when handling the hot jars and screwing on the lids.fig chutney in jars

❓ Frequently asked questions

How do I preserve fig and apple chutney?

As figs have a borderline acid pH, its advised to add acid to the jam - usually lemon juice. The acid helps to preserve the fruit correctly. In this case I've added vinegar instead. In terms of this particular recipe the 400ml of vinegar and 350g of sugar should be enough to preserve the chutney for at least 6 months. This is assuming that both vinegars have an acetic acid content of at least 5% and that the chutney is brought to boiling point during cooking and kept there for 30 minutes.

How do I seal the jars?

The chutney should also be transferred to sterilised jars (see above for sterilisation process) whilst it is still hot and jars should be sealed immediately. As the chutney cools a vacuum will form, pulling the lid in nice and tight.

How should chutney be stored?

You can check the seal of the jars by pressing on the lid to make sure it doesn’t depress any further. If it does depress and a seal hasn’t formed you will need to use a water bath to ensure proper processing or alternatively store in the fridge for 4-6 weeks.
This seal check and the sterilising of the jars in the oven should be enough to ensure the chutney stores well in the cupboard for 6 months. - Have a read of these preserving guidelines for more advice on storing chutneys/jams.
Once opened, after proper sealing, refrigerate and eat within 1 month.

💭 Top tips with Marigolds

  1. Surprisingly a Marigold glove can come in quite handy when you have a lot to chop. I tend to find that my chopping board wanders off or spins around when I'm chopping. However, pop a marigold glove under the board and problem solved.rubber glove under a chopping board to stop it slipping
  2. Marigolds are also particularly useful when it comes to handling and sealing hot jars. I usually sterilise my jars in a low oven and then transfer the hot chutney straight to the heated jars. The process of getting the chutney into the jar and getting the lids screwed on tight can be tricky when the jars and chutney are so hot. However, pop on a pair of Marigolds and your hands are automatically protected from the heat. In addition, the rubber glove provides extra grip so you can ensure the lids of the jars are screwed on super tight.using marigold gloves to tighten lids on chutney jars

Little homemade jars of chutney also make great Christmas presents - just add a cute label and ribbon and you're good to go. Even better - pair this gift up with a jar of my homemade Cranberry, Apple and Nutmeg sauce or my Spiced Pear and Cider Christmas Chutney 🙂

Other Christmas Recipes

📖 Recipe

Fig and apple chutney with cheese and biscuits
Print

📋 Fig and apple chutney with balsamic vinegar

A deliciously sweet fig chutney with crunchy seeds and sticky balsamic, which makes for the perfect chutney for cheese and biscuits. A great homemade chutney for Christmas and also one of my favourite homemade gifts to give out to friends and family. Find out how to make this lovely apple chutney and get my top tip for handling and sealing sterilised jars.This recipe makes 10 small jars (110ml/4fl oz) or 6 large jars (225ml/8fl oz) of chutney.
Course chutney, condiment, Dessert, sauces, side
Cuisine British
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 45 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 10 110ml jars
Calories 47.1kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 350 g red onions chopped
  • 500 g red apples cored and roughly chopped
  • 550 g large figs stems removed and cut into eighths
  • 350 g muscovado sugar
  • 2 teaspoon mixed spice
  • ½ teaspoon nutmeg
  • ½ teaspoon cinnamon
  • 150 ml red wine vinegar with acetic acid content of at least 5%
  • 250 ml balsamic vinegar with acetic acid content of at least 5%

Instructions

To make the chutney:

  • In a large pan heat the oil. Add the onions and gently cook until soft and slightly caramelised.
    chopping onions with a non slip board
  • Next add the chopped apples and figs. Sprinkle over the sugar and stir together well to dissolve the sugar.
    Slicing figs
  • Then add 2 teaspoon mixed spice, ½ teaspoon nutmeg, ½ teaspoon cinnamon, 150ml red wine vinegar and 250ml balsamic vinegar. Stir well.
    chopped figs and apples cooking in a large pan
  • Bring everything the boil and then turn down the heat and simmer for 30-45 minutes. Check and stir occasionally.
  • After 30 minutes or so use a masher to break up some of the large bits. Continue to simmer until you are happy with the consistency.

If serving immediately:

  • Transfer to a bowl and chill if desired.

If storing in jars:

  • Sterilise your clean jars either in the dishwasher or in the oven for 5 minutes at 150°C/300°F.
    fig chutney in jars
  • Transfer chutney into your jars whilst it is still hot and screw on the lids tightly (use a jam funnel for ease). A vacuum seal will form as the chutney cools. Tip: Use Marigold gloves to help when handling the hot jars and screwing on the lids.
    using marigold gloves to tighten lids on chutney jars

Notes

Jars: I usually use the small (110ml/4oz) jars and this recipe fills about 10 of those. If you have larger jars (225ml/8oz) it will probably fill around 6 of these.
Should I peel the apples?: I usually leave the skin on the apples as its easier and quicker, adds more flavour and means that theres still chunks of apple in the finished chutney. With the skin off the apple would break up and spread throughout the chutney – so just depends on your taste and if you would prefer chunky chutney (skin on) or smoother chutney (skin off).
How do I preserve my chutney?: In this recipe the 350g of sugar and 400ml of vinegar will preserve the chutney. Make sure that you use vinegars with at least 5% acetic acid content and bring the chutney to the boil and keep there for at least 30 minutes for this to be effective.
How do I sterilise my jars?: To sterilise the jars I usually wash them thoroughly in soapy hot water, then rinse and place on a baking tray in the oven for 5 minutes at 150°C/300°F (until dry). You can also put them through the dishwasher.
How do I seal the jars?: Place hot chutney in hot sterilised jars (use a jam funnel for ease) and seal immediately by screwing on the lid. As the chutney cools a vacuum will form, pulling the lid in nice and tight.
How is should chutney be stored?: You can check the seal of the jars by pressing on the lid to make sure it doesn’t depress any further. Jars of chutney can then be stored in the cupboard for up to 6 months. If the lid does depress and a seal hasn’t formed you will need to use a water bath to ensure proper processing or alternatively store in the fridge for 4-6 weeks. Once opened, after proper sealing, refrigerate and eat within 1 month.
Marigold tips: Use a marigold glove under your chopping bard to keep it steady. Put on a pair of marigolds to protect your hands when handling hot jars and to get a better grip when screwing on the lids.
nutritional info fig and apple chutney

Nutrition

Serving: 45g | Calories: 47.1kcal | Carbohydrates: 11g | Protein: 0.4g | Fat: 0.4g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Fiber: 0.4g | Sugar: 10.9g | Vitamin A: 3.6IU | Vitamin C: 1.1mg | Calcium: 14.6mg | Iron: 0.2mg

Please note that the above post contains affiliate links, which means if you click these links and then go on to purchase the products, I will receive a small percentage – this will not affect the amount you pay.  I will only ever link to and promote products that I have tried and tested myself. See my privacy policy and disclosure statement for further details.

The post Fig and Apple Chutney with balsamic vinegar appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/fig-apple-balsamic-chutney/feed/ 27
Massaman curry paste https://properfoodie.com/massaman-curry-paste/ https://properfoodie.com/massaman-curry-paste/#respond Tue, 14 Jan 2020 23:11:59 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=11912 Massaman curry paste made from scratch and whipped up in just 5 minutes. First blend together the ingredients to make Thai red curry paste, before adding extra spices to create Thai yellow curry paste and then finally massaman paste. Save a bit of each as its made so you can have the whole collection of...

Read More

The post Massaman curry paste appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Massaman curry paste made from scratch and whipped up in just 5 minutes. First blend together the ingredients to make Thai red curry paste, before adding extra spices to create Thai yellow curry paste and then finally massaman paste. Save a bit of each as its made so you can have the whole collection of Thai pastes jarred up and ready to go. Next time you fancy a Thai curry you'll be spoilt for choice. 

Massaman curry paste

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

This recipe is used as the base to create the sauce for Massaman curry. Massaman paste is actually created from Thai red curry paste but with sweeter spices added like cardamom seeds and ground cinnamon. As a result Massaman curry is much sweeter and milder than its other Thai relatives; Thai red curry and Thai green curry.

Other milder options for a curry night in include fish biryani, and chicken tikka masala curry with homemade tikka masala paste. For more recipe ideas for a cosy night in have a look at my romantic dinner recipes post.

🥄 How to use paste in a curry

Curry paste is usually made by blending together raw ingredients such as fresh chillies, fresh herbs, shallots, garlic and spices. Therefore, when making curry the curry paste is usually added to the pan first in order to start the cooking process and the release the flavour from all the herbs and spices. For Massaman curry, around 2 tablespoon of Massaman curry paste will be enough to make a curry for four people.

🌶 Massaman vs red curry paste

Thai red paste

Thai red curry paste is the base for making all other Thai curry pastes, apart from Thai green curry paste, which is stand alone and used for Thai green curry. From Thai red curry paste you can make Thai red curry or add further spices for Thai yellow curry paste or Massaman curry paste. In addition to this you can also use it to make Thai jungle curry, which is usually given extra heat by adding fresh chillies and dried chillies.

Thai yellow paste

Thai yellow curry paste is made by adding ground coriander, cumin, curry powder and black pepper to red paste. The result is a paste that is slightly milder in both flavour and colour. This paste can be used in Thai yellow curry and Chicken Panang curry.

Thai Massaman paste

Thai Massaman curry paste is made from the same ingredients as Thai red curry paste  but with a few additions. First, coriander, cumin, curry powder and black pepper are added to make Thai yellow paste.

Then Massaman paste is made by adding curry powder, cinnamon and cardamom to the Thai yellow paste. Ingredients are separated below so you can stop at either the Thai red or Thai yellow stage and save some of the paste for making red or yellow curries before continuing to make the Massaman paste.

a blend of Thai ingredients in a bowl with cardamom and cinnamon at the side

🥘 Ingredients

Thai red paste

  • 3 large shallots finely chopped (or 6 small - 75g)
  • 3 large red chillies finely chopped (50g)
  • 2 tbsp garlic paste or 1 clove chopped fresh garlic
  • 1 tbsp Thai galangal paste or freshly chopped ginger
  • 1 tbsp chopped lemongrass or lemongrass paste
  • 1 tbsp kaffir lime leaves or kaffir lime peel 
  • Splash of fish sauce
  • 1 tsp ground coriander
  • 1 tsp ground turmeric
  • ½ tbsp oil
  • Tap water if needed to loosen the mixture and help to blend.

Thai yellow paste

  • 4 tablespoon Thai red paste (made from the above)
  • ½ teaspoon ground coriander
  • ½ teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 teaspoon curry powder
  • Black pepper

Massaman paste

  • 2 tablespoon Thai yellow curry paste (made from the above)
  • 1 teaspoon curry powder
  • 1 teaspoon cinnamon powder
  • Seeds from 2 cardamom pods
placing thai ingredients in a blender

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Start by blending together the ingredients for Thai red paste. In a small blender add 3 large chopped shallots, 3 chopped red chillies, 1 finely chopped garlic clove or 2 tablespoon garlic paste, 1 tablespoon freshly chopped ginger or ginger paste, 1 tablespoon chopped lemongrass or lemongrass paste,1 tablespoon of kaffir lime leaves or kaffir lime peel, 1 tsp ground coriander, 1 tsp ground turmeric, and ½ tbsp oil. Blend until smooth adding tap water to loosen the mixture if requiredfish sauce
  2. At this point, if you like, you can put aside half of the paste for making Thai red curry. Keep in an air tight jar and store in the fridge for 1 week or freeze for up to 3 months.thai red curry paste freshly blended
  3. Next use the rest of the red paste as a base for making Thai yellow curry paste. Take 4 tablespoon of the Thai red paste and place in a small bowl. To this add ½ teaspoon ground coriander, ½ teaspoon ground cumin, 1 teaspoon curry powder and some Black pepper. Stir together until fully combined.adding spices to a bowl
  4. At this point, if you like, you can put aside half of the Thai yellow paste for making Thai yellow curry or Panang curry. Keep in an air tight jar and store in the fridge for 1 week or freeze for up to 3 months.Freshly made Thai yellow curry paste
  5. Finally, use the rest of the Thai yellow curry paste as a base for making Massaman paste. Take 2 tablespoon Thai yellow curry paste and place in a small bowl. To this add 1 teaspoon curry powder, 1 teaspoon cinnamon powder and the seed from 2 cardamom pods. TIP: use the flat side of knife to apply pressure to the cardamom pods and split them open. Discard the cardamom pod shells. Gently crush the cardamom seeds with the sharp edge of knife before adding to the paste mixture.adding spices to a bowl
  6. If you aren't planning to use the paste in a curry immediately, transfer to an air tight jar and store in the fridge for 1 week or freeze for up to 3 months. Defrost overnight in the fridge before use. To make massaman curry for 4 people you will need about 2 tablespoon of massaman curry paste.freshly made massaman curry paste

💭 Recipe tips

Can you freeze this paste?: Yes, store in a jar or sealable container and keep in the fridge for up to a week or in the freezer for up 3 months. Defrost thoroughly before use.

How much curry paste is needed in a curry?: Around 2 tablespoon of curry paste will be enough to make a curry for four. However, you can add slightly more or less depending on how strong you want the curry to be.

Is this recipe spicy?: Massaman paste, along with Thai yellow paste, is one of the mildest. Both red and green curry pastes are made with fresh chillies which provide the spice. As more spices are added to the red paste to make Massaman paste, the initial heat becomes diluted so providing a more gentle flavour.

Make in advance: Curry pastes are great made in advance as they store easily and can be used directly in whatever curry you are making as soon as you are ready to make it. I like to batch make mine and then split into small containers – each container has enough for one curry for 4 people. these can be stored in the fridge or freezer (see above) and then called upon when needed. Frozen paste can be microwaved for a minute or 2 and ready to use right away. 

Blending paste: Use a small blender to blend together the paste. If the ingredients don’t blend together easily then add a bit of water or olive oil to help get it going.

Scaling this recipe: If you plan to save half of each paste as its made, the amount of useable paste available to make the next paste will halve each time. Times up the amount of ingredients to make more. Or if you don't want to save either the Thai red paste or Thai yellow paste but want it all to go into Massaman paste: Count out the number of table spoons of red curry paste you have made and then add the appropriate amount of Thai yellow spices and Massaman spices to this (knowing that the amounts listed above make 8 tablespoon of thai red paste and 4 tablespoon of Thai yellow paste).

Example: You have 8 tablespoon of Thai Red paste that you would like to turn into Massaman paste. To this add 1 teaspoon ground coriander, 1 teaspoon ground cumin, 2 teaspoon curry powder, few grinds of black pepper, 4 teaspoon curry powder, 4 teaspoon cinnamon powder and the crushed seeds from 8 cardamom pods.

📖 Other paste recipes

Let me know what you think of this Massaman paste recipe by leaving a comment and rating below! You can also save this recipe on pinterest: Or if you prefer you can pin the video!

 15 minutes to produce recipeunder 100 kcalvegetarian recipebetter than takeaways fakeaway recipe

📖 Recipe

Massaman curry paste
Print

📋 Massaman curry paste

Massaman curry paste made from scratch and whipped up in just 5 minutes. First blend together the ingredients to make Thai red curry paste, before adding extra spices to create Thai yellow paste and then finally massaman paste. Save a bit of each as its made so you can have the whole collection of Thai pastes jarred up and ready to go. Next time you fancy a Thai curry you'll be spoilt for choice. 
THE RECIPE BELOW WILL ALLOW YOU TO SAVE HALF OF THE AMOUNT OF THAI RED PASTE AND THAI YELLOW PASTE THAT YOU MAKE ALONG THE WAY AND WILL LEAVE YOU WITH AROUND 2-3 tablespoon OF MASSAMAN CURRY PASTE - ENOUGH TO MAKE A CURRY FOR 4 PEOPLE.
Course condiment, paste
Cuisine Thai, Thailand
Prep Time 15 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 2 tablespoon
Calories 15.6kcal

Equipment

  • Small blender or nutribullet

Ingredients

For Thai red paste:

  • large shallots finely chopped  or 6 small - 75g
  • large red chillies finely chopped  50g
  • tbsp  garlic paste or 1 clove chopped fresh garlic
  • tbsp  Thai galangal paste or freshly chopped ginger
  • tbsp  chopped lemongrass or lemongrass paste
  • tbsp  kaffir lime leaves or kaffir lime peel
  • Splash of fish sauce
  • tsp  ground coriander
  • tsp  ground turmeric
  • ½  tbsp  oil
  • Tap water if needed to loosen the mixture and help to blend.

For Thai Yellow paste:

  • 4 tablespoon Thai red paste made from the above
  • ½ teaspoon ground coriander
  • ½ teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 teaspoon curry powder
  • Black pepper

For Massaman curry paste:

  • 2 tablespoon Thai yellow curry paste made from the above
  • 1 teaspoon curry powder
  • 1 teaspoon cinnamon powder
  • 2 cardamom pods

Instructions

To make Thai red paste

:

  • Start by blending together the ingredients to make Thai red paste. In a small blender add 3 large chopped shallots, 3 chopped red chillies, 1 finely chopped garlic clove or 2 tablespoon garlic paste, 1 tablespoon freshly chopped ginger or ginger paste, 1 tablespoon chopped lemongrass or lemongrass paste,1 tablespoon of kaffir lime leaves or kaffir lime peel, 1 tsp ground coriander, 1 tsp ground turmeric, and ½ tbsp oil. Blend until smooth adding tap water to loosen the mixture if required

.
    Collage of 4 images showing step by step how to make this this recipe for steps 1-4.
  • At this point, if you like, you can put aside half of the paste for making Thai red curry. Keep in an air tight jar and store in the fridge for 1 week or freeze for up to 3 months.
    thai red curry paste freshly blended

To make Thai yellow paste

:

  • Next use the rest of the Thai red paste as a base for making Thai yellow paste. Take 4 tablespoon of the red paste and place in a small bowl. To this add ½ teaspoon ground coriander, ½ teaspoon ground cumin, 1 teaspoon curry powder and some Black pepper. Stir together until fully combined.
    adding spices to Thai red paste to make thai yellow paste
  • At this point, if you like, you can put aside half of the Thai yellow paste for making Thai yellow curry. Keep in an air tight jar and store in the fridge for 1 week or freeze for up to 3 months.
    Freshly made Thai yellow curry paste

To make Massaman curry paste

:

  • Finally, use the rest of the Thai yellow paste as a base for making Massaman paste. Take 2 tablespoon Thai yellow curry paste and place in a small bowl. To this add 1 teaspoon curry powder, 1 teaspoon cinnamon powder and the seed from 2 cardamom pods.
  • TIP: use the flat side of knife to apply pressure to the cardamom pods and split them open. Discard the cardamom pod shells. Gently crush the cardamom seeds with the sharp edge of knife before adding to the paste mixture.
    mixing spices into thai yellow paste to make massaman paste

Storing and using the massaman curry paste:

  • If you aren't planning to use the paste in a curry immediately, transfer to an air tight jar and store in the fridge for 1 week or freeze for up to 3 months. Defrost overnight in the fridge before use. 
To make massaman curry for 4 people you will need about 2 tablespoon of massaman curry paste.
    freshly made massaman curry paste

Video

Notes

Can you freeze this paste?: Store in a jar or sealable container and keep in the fridge for up to a week or in the freezer for up 3 months. Defrost thoroughly before use.
How much curry paste is needed to make a curry?: Around 2 tablespoon of curry paste will be enough to make a curry for four. However, you can add slightly more or less depending on how strong you want the curry to be.
Is this recipe spicy?: Massaman paste, along with Thai yellow paste, is one of the mildest Thai curry pastes. Both red and green curry pastes are made with fresh chillies which provide the spice. As more spices are added to the red paste to make Massaman paste, the initial heat becomes diluted so providing a more gentle flavour.
Make in advance: Curry pastes are great to make in advance as they store easily and can be used directly in whatever curry you are making as soon as you are ready to make it. I like to batch make mine and then split into small containers – each container has enough to make one curry for 4 people. these can be stored in the fridge or freezer (see above) and then called upon when needed. Frozen paste can be microwaved for a minute or 2 and ready to use right away. 
Blending paste: Use a small blender to make the Thai red paste. If the ingredients don’t blend together easily then add a bit of water or olive oil to help get it going.
Scaling this recipe: If you plan to save half of each paste as its made, the amount of useable paste available to make the next paste will halve each time. Times up the amount of ingredients to make more. Or if you don't want to save either the Thai red paste or Thai yellow paste but want it all to go into Massaman paste: Count out the number of table spoons of red curry paste you have made and then add the appropriate amount of Thai yellow spices and Massaman spices to this (knowing that the amounts listed above make 8 tablespoon of thai red paste and 4 tablespoon of Thai yellow paste).
Example: You have 8 tablespoon of Thai Red paste that you would like to turn into Massaman paste. To this add 1 teaspoon ground coriander, 1 teaspoon ground cumin, 2 teaspoon curry powder, few grinds of black pepper, 4 teaspoon curry powder, 4 teaspoon cinnamon powder and the crushed seeds from 8 cardamom pods.
Nutritional info Massaman curry paste

Nutrition

Serving: 17g | Calories: 15.6kcal | Carbohydrates: 1.7g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 0.9g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.3g | Sodium: 40mg | Potassium: 154mg | Fiber: 0.2g | Sugar: 0.3g | Vitamin A: 32.6IU | Vitamin C: 6.2mg | Calcium: 44mg | Iron: 3.1mg
Homemade massaman curry paste

The post Massaman curry paste appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/massaman-curry-paste/feed/ 0
Thai Yellow Curry Paste https://properfoodie.com/thai-yellow-curry-paste/ https://properfoodie.com/thai-yellow-curry-paste/#respond Sat, 16 Nov 2019 18:07:00 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=13462 Thai yellow curry paste is easy create at home using just a few basic ingredients and spices. This versatile paste can be used as the base for a number of different Thai curries and is great to have handy in the fridge ready for your next 'fakeaway' Thai curry night. Whip up this paste in...

Read More

The post Thai Yellow Curry Paste appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Thai yellow curry paste is easy create at home using just a few basic ingredients and spices. This versatile paste can be used as the base for a number of different Thai curries and is great to have handy in the fridge ready for your next 'fakeaway' Thai curry night.

Thai yellow curry paste in a dish with peppercorns in the background

Whip up this paste in just 5 minutes - see the video below to find out just how easy this is. Plus watch how you can produce three pastes from one. 

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

📖 Making Thai curry paste at home

Thai yellow curry paste is made by adding ground coriander, cumin, curry powder and black pepper to already made or store bought Thai red curry paste. Thai red paste is the starting block for all other Thai curry pastes; apart from Thai green curry paste, which stands alone.

Thai yellow paste is slightly milder than red paste, in both flavour and colour, and can be used in a number of Thai dishes:

Thai yellow curry paste in a small dish with spices at the side

👩🏻‍🍳 Recipe inspiration

Ive based this recipe on curry paste I made in 2012 in Thailand when attending the Siam Rice cookery school in Chang Mai, Northern Thailand.

On this cookery course I had access to a traditional Thai food market and used fresh, whole spices. I can’t say its always convenient to get out a pestle and mortar and grind whole spices into powders. Nor is it always possible to get hold of all the traditional Thai ingredients that I used in Thailand. However, It is possible to closely match ingredients and of course use pre ground spices for the curry and the Thai yellow curry paste, which is what I have done for this recipe. 

🥘 Ingredients you will need for this paste

Full ingredients & recipe instructions in recipe card below: Jump to Recipe

For 4-5 tablespoon of this paste recipe you will need the following:

  • 4 tablespoon Thai red curry paste
  • ½ teaspoon ground coriander
  • ½ teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 teaspoon curry powder
  • Black pepper

Substitutions: If you don't have the time or the ingredients to make the red paste you can use a jar of shop bought paste instead.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Take 4 tablespoon of the Thai red paste (homemade or shop bought) and place in a small bowl.4 tablespoon of red paste being spooned into a small mixing bowl
  2. To this add ½ teaspoon ground coriander, ½ teaspoon ground cumin, 1 teaspoon curry powder and some Black pepper. Stir together until fully combined.half teaspoon ground coriander being added to the bowl
  3. At this point, if you like, you can put aside half of the Thai yellow paste for making Thai Massaman curry paste. The rest can then be used to make Thai yellow curry or Panang curry.mixing together red paste with coriander, curry powder, cumin and black pepper to make thai yellow paste
  4. If not using the paste right away then transfer to an air tight jar/container and store in the fridge for 1 week or freeze for up to 3 months.

🌶 Can you substitute red curry paste for yellow?

Red paste is the main ingredient in yellow curry paste and so technically it is already the same paste but with a few extra ingredients added. These additional ingredients create a different flavour and ultimately determine the type of curry you are making (see above).

If you prefer to buy jarred curry paste but are struggling to find Thai yellow paste then yes jarred Thai red is a great substitute and you can use this recipe to turn the shop bought red paste into yellow paste.

♨️ Is red curry paste hotter than yellow?

Red paste is slightly hotter than yellow due to the extra milder ingredients being added to make yellow paste.

💭 Recipe tips

Blending paste: Use a small blender to make the red paste. If the ingredients don't blend together easily then add a bit of water or olive oil to help get it going.

Storage and steralisation: Sterilise some small jars for storing any extra paste. Wash jars in warm water then place on a baking tray and dry in a low oven for 5 to 10 minutes. Fill the jars with paste whilst they are still warm and seal with a lid (use marigolds to help with handling hot jars). Store in the fridge for up to one month. Alternatively place leftover paste in a clean, sealable container (no sterilisation) and store in the fridge for up to 1 week or in the freezer for up to 3 months. 

Scaling this recipe: This recipe assumes the use of this Thai red paste recipe, which makes around 8 tablespoon of paste. This recipe also assumes that you would like to save some of the Thai red paste as well as using it to make the Thai yellow paste. Therefore, this recipe calls for half of the red paste (4 tbsp) and will make enough paste to go into 2 curry recipes for serving 4 people. If you want don't want to save half of the paste but want to use it all to make Thai yellow, then double the rest of the ingredients in this recipe. For any other amount just remember that the amount of spices in this recipe is for 4 tablespoon of Thai red paste.

Make in advance: Curry pastes are great to make in advance as they store easily and can be used directly in whatever curry you are making as soon as you are ready to make it. I like to batch make my curry pastes and then split into small containers - each container has enough to make one curry for 4 people. these can be stored in the fridge or freezer (see above) and then called upon when needed. Frozen paste can be microwaved for a minute or 2 and ready to use right away.  

🍛 Other curry recipes you might like to try:

 15 minutes to produce recipeunder 100 kcalBetter than takeawaysgluten free recipe

📖 Recipe

Thai yellow curry paste
Print

📋 Thai yellow curry paste

Thai yellow curry paste is easy to make at home using just a few basic ingredients and spices. This versatile paste can be used as the base for a number of different Thai curries and so its great to have handy in the fridge ready for your next 'fakeaway' Thai curry night.
Course condiment, main meal, meal prep
Cuisine Thai, Thailand
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 0 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 4 tablespoon
Calories 12.1kcal

Ingredients

  • Thai yellow paste
  • 4 tablespoon Thai red paste made from the above
  • ½ teaspoon ground coriander
  • ½ teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 teaspoon curry powder
  • Black pepper

Instructions

  • Take 4 tablespoon of the Thai red paste (homemade or shop bought) and place in a small bowl.
    4 tablespoon of thai red paste being spooned into a small mixing bowl
  • To this add ½ teaspoon ground coriander, ½ teaspoon ground cumin, 1 teaspoon curry powder and some Black pepper. Stir together until fully combined.
    1 teaspoon curry powder being added to bowl containing 3 tablespoon of thai red paste and half teaspoon of ground coriander
  • At this point, if you like, you can put aside half of the Thai yellow paste for making Thai Massaman curry paste. The rest can then be used to make Thai yellow curry or Panang curry.
    mixing together thai red paste with coriander, curry powder, cumin and black pepper to make thai yellow paste
  • If not using the paste right away then transfer to an air tight jar/container and store in the fridge for 1 week or freeze for up to 3 months.
    Thai yellow curry paste

Video

Notes

Blending paste: Use a small blender to make the Thai red paste. If the ingredients don't blend together easily then add a bit of water or olive oil to help get it going.
Storage and steralisation: Sterilise some small jars for storing any extra paste. Wash jars in warm water then place on a baking tray and dry in a low oven for 5 to 10 minutes. Fill the jars with paste whilst they are still warm and seal with a lid (use marigolds to help with handling hot jars). Store in the fridge for up to one month. Alternatively place leftover paste in a clean, sealable container (no sterilisation) and store in the fridge for up to 1 week or in the freezer for up to 3 months. 
Scaling this recipe: This recipe assumes the use of this Thai red paste recipe, which makes around 8 tablespoon of paste. This recipe also assumes that you would like to save some of the Thai red paste as well as using it to make the Thai yellow paste. Therefore, this recipe calls for half of the Thai red paste (4 tbsp) and will make enough paste to go into 2 curry recipes for serving 4 people. If you want don't want to save half of the Thai red paste but want to use it all to make Thai yellow, then double the rest of the ingredients in this recipe. For any other amount just remember that the amount of spices in this recipe is for 4 tablespoon of Thai red paste.
Make in advance: Curry pastes are great to make in advance as they store easily and can be used directly in whatever curry you are making as soon as you are ready to make it. I like to batch make my curry pastes and then split into small containers - each container has enough to make one curry for 4 people. these can be stored in the fridge or freezer (see above) and then called upon when needed. Frozen paste can be microwaved for a minute or 2 and ready to use right away.  
Nutritional info yellow curry paste

Nutrition

Serving: 13g | Calories: 12.1kcal | Carbohydrates: 1.3g | Protein: 0.8g | Fat: 0.7g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.3g | Potassium: 120.9mg | Fiber: 0.2g | Sugar: 0.3g | Vitamin A: 32.4IU | Vitamin C: 6.2mg | Calcium: 33.7mg | Iron: 1.7mg

The post Thai Yellow Curry Paste appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/thai-yellow-curry-paste/feed/ 0
Steak and veggie BBQ skewers https://properfoodie.com/steak-veggie-bbq-skewers/ https://properfoodie.com/steak-veggie-bbq-skewers/#comments Fri, 08 Jun 2018 13:44:25 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=6868 Ad feature for VERY LAZY Steak and onion BBQ skewers with smoked garlic and rosemary marinade, and veg and halloumi BBQ skewers with a spicy chilli marinade, served on a bed of green pesto quinoa Next up for my summer recipe collection is barbecued skewers with meat and veggie versions to please one and all!! For...

Read More

The post Steak and veggie BBQ skewers appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Ad feature for VERY LAZY

Steak and onion BBQ skewers with smoked garlic and rosemary marinade, and veg and halloumi BBQ skewers with a spicy chilli marinade, served on a bed of green pesto quinoa

BBQ skewers

Next up for my summer recipe collection is barbecued skewers with meat and veggie versions to please one and all!! For more summer recipe ideas have a look at my Stuffed peppers with couscous in cheese sauce, mint ice cream lollies, and some delightfully pink homemade Beetroot Hummus.

I love the smell of just-lit smoky coals on a barbecue, on a warm sunny day. I'm pretty sure for most people this will be the same - it sparks the memories of many a summer past with good food, refreshing drinks, relaxing times and plenty of laughs with friends and family. It usually means long days and sleeveless t-shirts and everyone finally getting chance to spend some good quality time in the garden - a rare occurrence in good old England.

rump steak and red onion Barbecue skewers

Having a couple of go-to BBQ recipes handy can make it a whole lot easier when thinking about an alfresco get-together. Now I know that I haven't yet managed to get around to a good burger recipe. However, burgers at a barbecue are just so expected. So, before even thinking about all the amazing burger creations that could go on a barbecue (And I promise I will at some point) I want to talk about BBQ skewers.

rump steak and veg Barbecue skewers with Very lazy dressing

BBQ skewers

Meat or veggie, cheese or onion, garlic or chilli, you can mix and match with skewers to your hearts content. Usually I either make mine all the same, or depending on whose dining and what leftovers I have in the fridge, I make a whole range with different meats and vegetables. But I think my favourite option is to leave out the sticks and cubed ingredients, then let my guests make their own!! You cant get better than that - saves time and everyone has fun and gets what they want.

rump steak and red onion BBQ skewers with pesto quinoa

The recipes below are for two of my favourite BBQ skewers: Steak & red onion, and Mediterranean veg with Halloumi. Very Lazy kindly send me some of their pastes and chopped ingredients to go with these skewers, which meant that adding a tasty marinade was super quick and easy.

For a chicken skewer option take a look at my chicken satay skewers.

Steak and Onion BBQ skewers with smoked garlic and rosemary marinade

Steak and onion BBQ skewers with Very lazy dressing

Very Lazy's jarred smoked chopped garlic is probably my favourite out of their range - it has such a wonderful flavour and it can go with or in just about anything. To make the marinade for the steak and onion skewers I mixed 1 teaspoon of the smoked chopped garlic with a teaspoon of olive oil, ½ teaspoon of dried rosemary, and a pinch of sea salt. Then drizzled over the skewers before cooking.

Mediterranean veg and halloumi skewers with spicy chilli marinade

veg and halloumi Barbecue skewers with Very lazy dressing

I love a bit of a spicy kick with my veg and halloumi skewers and the Very Lazy Chilli paste made this so easy to achieve. To make this marinade I just mixed together 2 tablespoons of the chilli paste with 1 tablespoon of olive oil and then poured evenly over the veg skewers before cooking.

No plans for a barbecue?? These skewers cook just as well in the oven!!

If you are serving the skewers as a main meal you may want a side to go with it - the recipes below include a pesto quinoa, which is a lovely summery accompaniment to both the steak and veg skewers.

🍖 Other steak recipes

 30 minutes to make recipeunder 500 calories recipeslow carb option recipe1 of 5 a day

📖 Recipe

BBQ skewers
Print

Steak and veggie BBQ skewers

Steak and onion BBQ skewers with smoked garlic and rosemary marinade, and veg and halloumi BBQ skewers with a spicy chilli marinade, served on a bed of green pesto quinoa
Course Dinner, Main Course, party food
Cuisine British
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 2 People
Calories 250kcal

Ingredients

For the Steak and Onion Skewers

  • 300 g rump steak
  • 2 small red onions 150g
  • 1 teaspoon Very Lazy smoked chopped garlic
  • 1 teaspoon olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon dried rosemary
  • Pinch sea salt

For the Veg and Halloumi Skewers

  • 1 Red bell pepper deseeded (100g)
  • 1 small courgette 150g
  • 2 large mushrooms 60g
  • 150 g halloumi cheese
  • 2 tablespoon Very Lazy chilli paste
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil

For the green pesto quinoa

  • 100 g dried quinoa
  • 200 ml boiling water
  • 1 tablespoon pesto
  • Juice from half a lime

Extras:

  • Fresh basil leaves and pine nuts if desired

Equipment

  • Barbecue if barbecuing - can be baked in the oven
  • 4 wooden or metal skewers

Instructions

To make steak and onion skewers:

  • Light the barbecue or pre heat the oven to 180 degrees C.
  • If using wooden skewers, soak these in tap water for a few minutes to prevent them from burning during cooking.
  • Cut the steak and onion into cubes. Try to make the onion and steak similar sizes (particularly if sealing off in a pan before barbecuing or roasting). Larger bits of onion may get in the way of sealing the steak properly in the pan.
  • Thread the steak and onion alternately onto two of the skewers, try to have even amounts on each skewer. Place on a baking tray.
  • In a small bowl or cup mix together the smoked garlic, oil, rosemary and sea salt. Then drizzle over the skewers. Refrigerate if not cooking right away.
  • To cook the skewers on the barbecue, place directly on the grill shelf of your barbecue, over hot coals and cook on each side for 5-7 minutes. Then serve. If cooking in the oven you can briefly fry off in a pan first, but this is optional. This gives a nice charred finished and also seals the steak. To cook through place back on the baking tray and cook in the centre of the preheated oven for 15 minutes.

To make the veg and halloumi skewers

  • Light the barbecue or pre heat the oven to 180 degrees C.
  • If using wooden skewers, soak these in tap water for a few minutes to prevent them from burning during cooking.
  • Cut the pepper and halloumi into cubes, halve the 2 mushrooms, and cut the courgette into circles and then halve these into semi circles. Try to make the cut ingredients similar sizes for even cooking later on.
  • Thread the pepper, courgette and halloumi alternately onto two of the skewers, and add the halved mushrooms and 2 evenly spaced points on each skewer. Try to have even amounts on each skewer. Place on a baking tray.
  • In a small bowl or cup mix together the chilli paste and oil. Then drizzle over the skewers. Refrigerate if not cooking right away.
  • To cook the skewers on the barbecue, place directly on the grill shelf of your barbecue, over hot coals and cook on each side for 5-7 minutes. Then serve. To cook in the oven leave the skewers on the baking tray baking tray and place this directly in the centre of the preheated oven. Cook for 20 minutes or until the veg is slightly charred and the halloumi has started to brown.

To make the green pesto quinoa

  • If you are serving the skewers as a main meal you may want a side to go with it - pesto quinoa is a lovely summery accompaniment to both the steak and veg skewers.
  • Place the dried quinoa in a small pan and add the boiling water. Place on a medium heat and cover with a lid. Simmer for 10 minutes or until all the water has been absorbed. Then leave to rest for 10 minutes by placing the pan to one side and leaving the lid on.
  • After 10 minutes remove the lid, squeeze in the lime juice then fluff the cooked quinoa with a fork. Add the pesto and mix well. Serve with the skewers. Add fresh basil leaves and pine nuts for decoration.

Nutrition

Serving: 1g | Calories: 250kcal | Carbohydrates: 7.2g | Protein: 34g | Fat: 9.5g | Saturated Fat: 3.1g | Sodium: 480mg | Sugar: 9.5g

PIN FOR LATER

steak and veggie summer BBQ skewers

The post Steak and veggie BBQ skewers appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/steak-veggie-bbq-skewers/feed/ 6
Foil Pack Potatoes https://properfoodie.com/foil-pack-potatoes/ https://properfoodie.com/foil-pack-potatoes/#respond Wed, 19 Jun 2019 21:18:01 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=10145 Foil pack potatoes cooked on the barbecue or roasted in the oven with a buttery, herb and garlic dressing. Crack open these mouthwatering potatoes at your next gathering and everyone will want the recipe! Foil pack potatoes The smell of these little potatoes will hit you way before you've even caught a glimpse of them....

Read More

The post Foil Pack Potatoes appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Foil pack potatoes cooked on the barbecue or roasted in the oven with a buttery, herb and garlic dressing. Crack open these mouthwatering potatoes at your next gathering and everyone will want the recipe!foil pack potatoes

Foil pack potatoes

The smell of these little potatoes will hit you way before you've even caught a glimpse of them. Theres no holding back the aroma of dried rosemary slowly baking away whilst nestled in foil with garlic and butter. Once the foil is unwrapped its usually a matter of second before they're all gone.

Roasting or grilling potatoes and veggies really brings out the best flavour and there are so many fantastic ways of doing this. My favourite is is oven baked cauliflower cheese with a creamy homemade cheese sauce. For something a little less fattening; Honey glazed carrots and parsnips cooked on a tray in the oven until perfectly caramelised by the heat, perfect for Sunday dinner or even Christmas day. Or how about roasted Cauliflower salad, which is very popular at the minute. This roasted cauliflower salad is a great dish for serving up at a party or to make your working lunch a little more interesting.

garlic and rosemary roast potatoes

Ingredients for foil pack potatoes

  • Baby potatoes
  • Olive oil
  • Dried rosemary
  • Fresh thyme
  • Whole garlic cloves
  • Sea salt
  • Butter
  • Fresh parsley

How to cook Potatoes in Foil Packets

  1. Pre heat barbecue grill to medium or oven to 200 degrees C. Chop potatoes into bite sized pieces then place in a bowl and mix with oil, seasoning, whole garlic cloves and dried rosemary.mix well to fully coat the potatoes
  2. Transfer the potatoes to a piece of foil, around 70cm in length. Bunch the potatoes in the middle of the foil and on top place 3 sprigs of thyme and 15g of cubed of butter.transfer to foil
  3. Bring the edges of the foil together and wrap.wrap and close foil
  4. Barbecue or roast for 40 minutes then remove from the grill or oven and open up the foil. Remove the thyme and add in more butter and seasoning then return to the grill or oven with the foil open.after 40 minutes unwrap and remove thyme, add more seasoning and butter
  5. Cook for a further 15 minutes or until golden brown then top with parsley and enjoy.bake open for a further 15 minutes the top with parsley

Can I cook foil packets in the oven?

Yes foil packets are perfect for oven cooking. Theres no need to prepare anything differently just place the foil pack on a tray before inserting into the oven.

roast garlic butter potatoes

Foil pack potatoes are the perfect side dish to your meat and 2 veg and so will go well with almost any meal. If you do have the Barbecue out then definitely pair this recipe up with a grilled porterhouse steak or how about grilled lamb chops with mustard, rosemary and garlic.

potatoes on the barbecue

These potatoes are also great with a lighter salad option or even just on their own. So next time you're having a barbecue make sure you get a pack of these on the grill!

Other potato recipes ideas

 1 hour to produceunder 500 kcal recipehigh in nutrients recipe

📖 Recipe

foil pack potatoes
Print

Foil pack potatoes

Foil pack potatoes grilled on the barbecue or roasted in the oven with a buttery, herb and garlic dressing. Crack open these mouthwatering potatoes at your next gathering and everyone will want the recipe!
Course Appetizer, party food, Side Dish, Snack, starter, sunday dinner
Cuisine American, British
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 55 minutes
0 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 4 people
Calories 196.8kcal

Ingredients

  • 660 g Baby potatoes chopped into bite size pieces
  • ½ tablespoon Olive oil
  • 1 tablespoon Dried rosemary
  • 3 Sprigs fresh thyme
  • 7 Whole garlic cloves no need to peel
  • Pinch of Sea salt and pepper
  • 30 g Butter
  • 20 g Fresh parsley

Instructions

  • Pre heat the barbecue to medium or oven to 200 degrees Chop the potatoes into bite sized pieces then place in a bowl and mix with oil, seasoning, whole garlic cloves and dried rosemary.
    mix well to fully coat the potatoes
  • Transfer the potatoes to a piece of foil, around 70cm in length. Bunch the potatoes in the middle of the foil. Place 3 sprigs of thyme and half (15of cubed of butter on top of the potatoes.
    transfer to foil
  • Bring the edges of the foil together and wrap, ensuring a tight seal all around. If the width of the foil isn’t long enough to wrap properly then double wrap with second piece of foil in the opposite direction.
    wrap and close foil
  • Place the foil directly onto the barbecue grill or if roasting place on a tray before inserting into the oven.
  • Grill or roast for 40 minutes then remove from the grill or oven and open up the foil. Remove the thyme and add in the rest of the butter and season again. Then return to the grill or oven with the foil open and cook for a further 15 minutes or until golden brown.
    after 40 minutes unwrap and remove thyme, add more seasoning and butter
  • Top with parsley and enjoy!
    bake open for a further 15 minutes the top with parsley

Video

Nutrition

Serving: 186g | Calories: 196.8kcal | Carbohydrates: 28.7g | Protein: 3.4g | Fat: 8.4g | Saturated Fat: 4.4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.5g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2.8g | Sodium: 160mg | Sugar: 2.4g

I first shared this Foil pack potatoes recipe on the Sunday Supper Movement site where I am a contributor.

foil pack potatoes baked in the oven with garlic cloves and served with butter and parsley

The post Foil Pack Potatoes appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/foil-pack-potatoes/feed/ 0
Honey and Lemon Tea https://properfoodie.com/warm-water-with-lemon-and-honey/ https://properfoodie.com/warm-water-with-lemon-and-honey/#respond Fri, 08 Jan 2021 16:40:36 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=8251 HONEY AND LEMON TEA RECIPE. AD FEATURE FOR SILVER MUSHROOM. Steamy honey and lemon tea with sliced lemon and fresh thyme. Make this rejuvenating hot toddy in just 10 minutes to give you a boost during those cold winter days. Arguably one of the best remedies for a cold, filled with plenty of vitamins and a...

Read More

The post Honey and Lemon Tea appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>

HONEY AND LEMON TEA RECIPE. AD FEATURE FOR SILVER MUSHROOM.

Steamy honey and lemon tea with sliced lemon and fresh thyme. Make this rejuvenating hot toddy in just 10 minutes to give you a boost during those cold winter days. Arguably one of the best remedies for a cold, filled with plenty of vitamins and a nice boost of sugar. Especially good when infused with some fragrant thyme and a tiny pinch of salt.

Honey and lemon tea in a glass tea cup viewed from above.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

The festive period is rife with alcohol. Every trip, every special day, every visit to a friends house.... it can very quickly get out of hand. With this in mind its always nice to have an alternative non alcoholic option or a soothing recovery drink.

Honey and lemon tea is a great option for a virgin hot toddy. Its also sweetened with natural sugar, provides a tangy boost of vitamin C from the lemon juice and is full of goodness from all the health benefits of honey. I also like to add in the juice from oranges and limes, the more citrusy the better! And of course its great to have a healthy boost of vitamins and other essential nutrients.

🍽 Equipment notes

Useful bits of equipment for making this recipe:

🥘 Ingredients

To make this virgin hot toddy you will need:

A display of all the ingredients needed to make honey and lemon tea with text overlay labelling each ingredient.

Ingredient notes

Juices: Lemon juice is the main ingredients required for the recipe. Orange juice brings sweetness and lime juice brings sour so you can flavour to your taste.

Honey: Honey is essential for balancing out the sour lemon flavour and is the main medicinal agent bringing its soothing effects.

Salt: Only the tiniest pinch of salt is needed in this drink. Its only really necessary if you are feeling particularly rough, run down and in need of a sodium boost. If not you may prefer to leave this out.

Thyme: Purely for aromatic flavour.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. In a tea cup or mug add the 3 juices and stir in a tablespoon of honey.
  2. Next add the sliced lemon, lime and orange and sprinkle in a tiny pinch of salt and some fresh thyme.
  3. Top up with hot water.
  4. Stir well to fully dissolve the honey and salt. Four images showing how to make Honey tea in stages.

❓ Frequently asked questions

Does honey and warm water with lemon cure a cold?

Although this lovely beverage can be helpful to soothe a sore throat or loosen congestion, it unfortunately isn't a magic remedy and probably won't release you from the relinquishing grips of a nasty cold. However, the NHS does now recommend warm water with lemon and honey to treat coughs, rather than over the counter cough medicine!! Very useful to know!!

Does lemon and warm water aid weight loss?

Drinking warm water is a great way to keep warm in the winter and stave off hunger pangs. So although not directly related to weight loss, this lovely beverage may aid you in a weight loss journey, by keeping you fuller for longer and ensuring your digestive system has had plenty of time to digest the previous meal before you eat again.

What are the benefits of drinking honey and lemon tea?

The combination of lemon and honey is particularly good for easing the symptoms of a cold. The lemon can help loosen congestion and honey can soothe a sore throat. This citrus tea will also provide a nice boost of vitamin C to help the immune system. In addition good quality honey contains antioxidants which have been linked to reducing the risks of strokes, heart disease and some cancers.

Steamy cup of lemon tea in a glass teacup sat on a bronze mottled tray.

☕ Other hot drink recipes

🍋 Other recipes that use lemon

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Honey and lemon tea in a glass tea cup viewed from above.
Print

Honey And Lemon Tea

Steamy honey and lemon tea with sliced lemon and fresh thyme. Make this rejuvenating hot toddy in just 10 minutes to give you a boost during those cold winter days. Arguably one of the best remedies for a cold, filled with plenty of vitamins and a nice boost of sugar. Especially good when diffused with some fragrant thyme and a tiny pinch of salt.
Course beverage
Cuisine British
Prep Time 10 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 1 cup or mug
Calories 75kcal

Ingredients

  • ½ a large orange juiced
  • Squeeze of lime juice
  • ½ a lemon juiced
  • 1 tablespoon honey
  • Tiny pinch of sea salt
  • Slices of lemon lime and orange
  • Few sprigs of fresh thyme leaves
  • Hot water to top up

Instructions

  • In a tea cup or mug add the 3 juices and stir in a tablespoon of honey.
  • Next add the sliced lemon, lime and orange and sprinkle in a tiny pinch of salt and some fresh thyme.
  • Top up with hot water.
  • Stir well to fully dissolve the honey and salt.

Notes

Ingredient notes:
Juices: Lemon juice is the main ingredients required for the recipe. Orange and lime are optional. Orange juice brings sweetness and lime juice brings sour so you can flavour to your taste.
Honey: Honey is essential for balancing out the sour lemon flavour and is the main medicinal agent bringing its soothing effects.
Salt: Only the tiniest pinch of salt is needed in this drink. Its only really necessary if you are feeling particularly rough, run down and in need of a sodium boost. If not you may prefer to leave this out.
Thyme: Purely for aromatic flavour.
Does honey and warm water with lemon cure a cold?
Although this lovely beverage can be helpful to soothe a sore throat and loosen congestion, it unfortunately isn't a magic remedy and probably won't release you from the relinquishing grips of a nasty cold. However, the NHS does now recommend warm water with lemon and honey to treat coughs, rather than over the counter cough medicine!! Very useful to know!!
What are the benefits of drinking honey and lemon tea?
The combination of lemon and honey is particularly good if you have a cold. The lemon can help loosen congestion and honey can soothe a sore throat. This citrus tea will also provide a nice boost of vitamin C to help the immune system. In addition good quality honey contains antioxidants which have been linked to reducing the risks of strokes, heart disease and some cancers.

Nutrition

Serving: 250ml | Calories: 75kcal | Carbohydrates: 20g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 205mg | Sugar: 19g | Vitamin C: 14mg

This post was first published in December 2018. Updated in January 2021 with an improved recipe and new images, step-by-step photos and recipe tips.

The post Honey and Lemon Tea appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/warm-water-with-lemon-and-honey/feed/ 0
Kedgeree with poached or boiled eggs https://properfoodie.com/kedgeree-with-poached-eggs/ https://properfoodie.com/kedgeree-with-poached-eggs/#comments Wed, 17 Feb 2016 08:31:57 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=1680 A beautiful kedgeree rice dish full of the flavours of cardamom and curry served with bright pink pieces of salmon and a runny poached egg. A few weekends ago myself and a few friends had a night away in London in celebration of a 30th birthday. That's right.... this is the year that me and...

Read More

The post Kedgeree with poached or boiled eggs appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
A beautiful kedgeree rice dish full of the flavours of cardamom and curry served with bright pink pieces of salmon and a runny poached egg.

Kedgeree in the pan

A few weekends ago myself and a few friends had a night away in London in celebration of a 30th birthday. That's right.... this is the year that me and most of my friends turn 30! This does seem slightly ridiculous, as we can't all possibly be that grown up, but some how - it's all true. However, it does mean that there's lots of celebrating to be done and the first celebration kicked off in London. It was only a quick trip with one night away, but whilst we were there we managed to squeeze in 3 amazing restaurants: The Fish market for lunch, The Shard for a fancy evening meal and Muriel's Kitchen for a detox smoothie and recovery breakfast.

The Fish Market is where the inspiration for this recipe came from. I had a huge mountain of mussels to start in a wonderful creamy white wine sauce with just a hint of chilli. Followed by a wonderfully warming salmon kedgeree, which was just what I needed after the 2 hour train journey and brisk walk in the cool London air.

So once I was back home, I set out to come up with my own take on this vibrant dish. The great thing about kedgeree is that it's really not that difficult and everything can be thrown into one pan. Okay, so the fish needs to be cooked separately and the eggs need to be poached, but these are minor yet tasty details that are well worth the extra effort.

Once the salmon is cooked and in the pot the dish really starts to come together. The plump pink salmon flakes against the bright yellow spiced rice is a match made in fish dish heaven. If you can get a runny yolk as well, then you're definitely in for a treat.

For more healthy breakfast inspiration have a look at my healthy banana bread, breakfast loaf with sultanas, summer porridge bowl, healthy breakfast on the go, Bircher muesli with stewed apples, Orange summer smoothieSalmon kedgeree with boiled eggs, Matcha granola and blueberry yogurt pot, and Full English breakfast bowl.

📖 Recipe

Print

Kedgeree with poached or boiled eggs

A beautiful kedgeree rice dish full of the flavours of cardamom and curry served with bright pink pieces of salmon and a runny poached egg
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 45 minutes

Ingredients

  • 2 tablespoon Rapeseed/olive oil
  • 2 Salmon fillets
  • 125 g long grain rice
  • 1 red onion diced
  • 5 spring onions roughly chopped
  • 1 garlic clove finely chopped
  • 2 cm piece of fresh ginger finely chopped
  • 100 ml white wine
  • 3 cardamom pods crushed
  • ½ teaspoon onion seeds
  • ½ teaspoon turmeric
  • ½ teaspoon garam masala
  • 500 ml veg stock
  • 1 red chilli finely chopped
  • juice of 1 lemon
  • 1 tin broad beans
  • Handful fresh parsley chopped
  • Handful fresh coriander chopped
  • 2 eggs

Instructions

  • First, heat the oven to 180 degrees C. Place the salmon fillets in the centre of a piece of foil, drizzle with oil and season. Loosely wrap the foil around the fish and bake in the oven for 15-20 minutes.?Next heat up a tablespoon of oil in a wok or large frying pan. Add the red onion and gently cook for 2 minutes.
  • Once the onion has started to soften pour in the uncooked rice and stir well to coat each grain with the oil. Whilst continuing to stir add the garlic, ginger, cardamom pods, turmeric, garam masala and onion seeds. Stir well to ensure the rice is coated with the spices. Add the white wine to the pan and bring to the boil, allowing the wine to soak into the rice. Once the wine has reduced by at least half, pour in the stock, add the spring onions, bring to a simmer and cover with a lid.
  • Leave to cook for around 10 minutes, checking and stirring occasionally.
  • While the rice is cooking, boil a small pan of water then bring to a simmer and poach the 2 eggs by cracking directly into the water. Poach for around 3-4 minutes then plunge into a bowl of cold water to stop the cooking process. When ready to serve place the eggs back into boiling water for 30 seconds in order to reheat.
  • If you prefer the eggs can be boiled in the shell for around 6 minutes, then peeled and sliced into quarters.
  • After the rice has been simmering for 10 minutes, check it is cooked then remove the lid and add the broad beans, red chilli and lemon juice. Stir well and cook with the lid off for a further 2 minutes.?Flake the cooked salmon and remove the pan from the heat. Add the salmon to the rice along with the parsley and coriander. Stir gently then serve up along with the eggs.

The post Kedgeree with poached or boiled eggs appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/kedgeree-with-poached-eggs/feed/ 2
Cranberry Sauce Recipe https://properfoodie.com/cranberry-sauce-apple-nutmeg/ https://properfoodie.com/cranberry-sauce-apple-nutmeg/#comments Sun, 02 Jan 2022 20:24:17 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=2995 Homemade cranberry sauce recipe full of fresh juicy berries and flavoured with spicy nutmeg. A great homemade Christmas gift and the perfect condiment for Christmas day dinner. A simple and delicious sauce that only takes 45 minutes to make and jar up. 👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe Not only is the best sauce to serve...

Read More

The post Cranberry Sauce Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Homemade cranberry sauce recipe full of fresh juicy berries and flavoured with spicy nutmeg. A great homemade Christmas gift and the perfect condiment for Christmas day dinner. A simple and delicious sauce that only takes 45 minutes to make and jar up.

Homemade cranberry sauce in a small jar with a teaspoonful of sauce at the side with larger jar in background.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

Not only is the best sauce to serve up on Christmas Day but it also makes for a pretty good Christmas present. With little jars at the ready and a few tags this easy homemade cranberry sauce recipe can quickly be turned into a great homemade foodie gift.

🥘 Ingredients

This recipe makes 10 small jars (110ml/4fl oz) or 6 large jars (225ml/8fl oz) of sauce. To make homemade cranberry sauce you will need:

cranberry and apple sauce christmas present

Ingredient notes

Measurements: For the amounts required, see the recipe card below and use the toggle button to see the recipe in cups.

Cranberries: Use fresh cranberries

Muscavado sugar: Muscovado sugar is a coarse, unrefined, dark brown sugar. It contains natural molasses and has a toffee-like taste, which balances out the tart cranberries. The next best alternative is dark brown sugar. However, this has less molasses and so a milder taste.

Apples: Use baking apples, which cook down into a smooth puree and so are the best option for a sauce.

Ground nutmeg: This is optional but I like to add this for a hint of festive spice.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Peel and chop the apples and squeeze the juice out of half an orange.
  2. Place all the ingredients in one large pan, mix well and put on the hob on a medium heat.
  3. Bring to the boil then allow to simmer gently.
  4. Simmer for 30 minutes or until apples are soft and cranberries have burst.Four step by step images showing how to make cranberry sauce for steps 1-4.
  5. After 30 minutes use a masher to help mush down any larger pieces of apple or un-burst berries. Continue to simmer, allowing the liquid to reduce, until you are happy with the consistency.
  6. Transfer the hot cranberry sauce to sterilised jars. Screw the lids on right away so a tight vacuum seal will form as the sauce cools.Two step by step images showing how to make cranberry sauce for steps 5-6.
  7. If you plan to eat the sauce that day or week then once the sauce has cooled, transfer to a dish or container, cover and keep the fridge until needed.

💭 Expert tips

  • Consistency: Cranberry sauce should have a jam like consistency. The sauce will thicken and become jam like as the cranberries are heated and release pectin. Be aware that as the sauce cools it will become thicker. Therefore, stop heating the sauce when it is still slightly thinner than you would like.
  • Handling hot sterilised jars: For ease, use rubber gloves for handling hot jars and to ensure a tight grip when screwing on the lids.

❓ Frequently asked questions

How do you sterilise jars?

To sterilise the jars wash them thoroughly in soapy hot water, then rinse and place on a baking tray in the oven for 5 minutes at 150°C/300°F (until dry). Alternatively, put them through the dishwasher.

How to seal the jars?

Place hot cranberry sauce in hot sterilised jars (use a jam funnel for ease) and seal immediately by screwing on the lid. As the sauce cools a vacuum will form, pulling the lid in nice and tight.

How to store?

You can check the seal of the jars by pressing on the lid to make sure it doesn’t depress any further. Jars of cranberry sauce can then be stored in the cupboard for up to 6 months. If the lid does depress and a seal hasn’t formed you will need to use a water bath to ensure proper processing or alternatively store in the fridge for 4-6 weeks. Once opened, after proper sealing, refrigerate and eat within 1 month.

Is cranberry sauce meant to be sweet or sour?

Cranberry sauce is a balance between sweet from the sugar and tart from the cranberries. Tartness can be reduced by the addition of sweet juices such as apple or orange juice.

Small jar filled with homemade cranberry sauce with a spoonful of sauce at the side.

Other Christmas recipe ideas

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Homemade cranberry sauce in a small jar with a teaspoonful of sauce at the side with larger jar in background.
Print

Cranberry Sauce Recipe

Homemade cranberry sauce recipe full of fresh juicy berries and flavoured with spicy nutmeg. A great homemade Christmas gift and the perfect condiment for Christmas day dinner. A simple and delicious sauce that only takes 45 minutes to make and jar up.
Course condiment, Side Dish
Cuisine British
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 45 minutes
Servings 10 Small jars
Calories 203kcal

Equipment

  • Masher
  • Jam funnel and jam jars (if jarring)

Ingredients

  • 600 g cranberries
  • 400 g baking apples cored peeled and chopped

  • 400 g light brown muscavado sugar
  • Juice from ½ an orange
  • 250 ml water
  • 1 ½ teaspoon ground nutmeg

Instructions

  • Peel and chop the apples and squeeze the juice out of half an orange.
    400 g baking apples, Juice from ½ an orange
  • Place all the ingredients in one large pan, mix well and put on the hob on a medium heat.
    600 g cranberries, 400 g baking apples, 400 g light brown muscavado sugar, Juice from ½ an orange, 250 ml water, 1 ½ teaspoon ground nutmeg
  • Bring to the boil then allow to simmer gently.
  • Simmer for 30 minutes or until apples are soft and cranberries have burst.
  • After 30 minutes use a masher to help mush down any larger pieces of apple or un-burst berries. Continue to simmer, allowing the liquid to reduce, until you are happy with the consistency.
  • Transfer the hot cranberry sauce to sterilised jars. Screw the lids on right away so a tight vacuum seal will form as the sauce cools.
  • If you plan to eat the sauce that day or week then once the sauce has cooled, transfer to a dish or container, cover and keep the fridge until needed.

Notes

Cranberries: Use fresh cranberries.
Muscavado sugar: Muscovado sugar is a coarse, unrefined, dark brown sugar. It contains natural molasses and has a toffee-like taste, which balances out the tart cranberries. The next best alternative is dark brown sugar. However, this has less molasses and so a milder taste.
Apples: Use baking apples, which cook down into a smooth puree and so are the best option for a sauce.
Ground nutmeg: This is optional but I like to add this for a hint of festive spice.
Consistency: Cranberry sauce should have a jam like consistency. The sauce will thicken and become jam like as the cranberries are heated and release pectin. Be aware that as the sauce cools it will become thicker. Therefore, stop heating the sauce when it is still slightly thinner than you would like.
Handling hot sterilised jars: For ease, use rubber gloves for handling hot jars and to ensure a tight grip when screwing on the lids.
How do you sterilise jars? To sterilise the jars wash them thoroughly in soapy hot water, then rinse and place on a baking tray in the oven for 5 minutes at 150°C/300°F (until dry). Alternatively, put them through the dishwasher.
How to seal the jars? Place hot cranberry sauce in hot sterilised jars (use a jam funnel for ease) and seal immediately by screwing on the lid. As the sauce cools a vacuum will form, pulling the lid in nice and tight.
How to store? You can check the seal of the jars by pressing on the lid to make sure it doesn’t depress any further. Jars of cranberry sauce can then be stored in the cupboard for up to 6 months. If the lid does depress and a seal hasn’t formed you will need to use a water bath to ensure proper processing or alternatively store in the fridge for 4-6 weeks. Once opened, after proper sealing, refrigerate and eat within 1 month.
Is cranberry sauce meant to be sweet or sour? Cranberry sauce is a balance between sweet from the sugar and tart from the cranberries. Tartness can be reduced by the addition of sweet juices such as apple or orange juice.

Nutrition

Serving: 30g | Calories: 203kcal | Carbohydrates: 52g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 14mg | Potassium: 152mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 46g | Vitamin A: 62IU | Vitamin C: 11mg | Calcium: 42mg | Iron: 1mg

This post was first published in Dec 2016. Updated in Dec 2021 with new images, step by step instructions and expert tips.

This post contains affiliate links, which means if you click the link and then go on to purchase, I will receive a percentage of the cost. See my privacy policy and disclosure statement for further details.

Cranberry, apple and nutmeg sauce a great homemade Christmas present and perfect condiment to Christmas dinner

 

The post Cranberry Sauce Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/cranberry-sauce-apple-nutmeg/feed/ 2
No churn ice cream: 3 Ways https://properfoodie.com/no-churn-ice-cream-3-ways/ https://properfoodie.com/no-churn-ice-cream-3-ways/#respond Wed, 24 Aug 2016 15:55:50 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=2247 So far this week I've had the most fun time ever; making and taking photos of ice cream! The sun is still here (for the moment) and I am making the most of it. Ice cream has most definitely got to be the British staple when the sun is shining. It doesn't take much, just...

Read More

The post No churn ice cream: 3 Ways appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
jump to recipe square

So far this week I've had the most fun time ever; making and taking photos of ice cream!

Homemade-ice-cream-3-ways-in-glass

The sun is still here (for the moment) and I am making the most of it. Ice cream has most definitely got to be the British staple when the sun is shining. It doesn't take much, just the briefest of warm spells and the ice cream is out (even before we get to venture as far as floppy sun hats and shorts). But what is most astounding about ice cream (in my opinion anyway) is how ridiculously easy it is to make and how much more enjoyable it is when you get to hand out scoops of your own homemade creamy ice cream to friends and family. This recipe is no churn ice cream and so its really very simple.

This no churn ice cream is  minimum effort and maximum fun.

Just a few ingredients, a quick whip up in the mixer, into the freezer for a few hours, no churning required and then dish up.

I love ice cream and definitely love trying different flavours, so there was no way that I was just going for one type of ice cream when I started on this recipe. In the end I went for 3 flavours: first of all starting with the simple yet ever so popular vanilla;

vanilla-ice-cream-in-cone

then venturing to the fabulously, tipsy rum and raisin;

Homemade-rum-and-raisin-ice-cream-scoop

before going for a something a little bit different with cardamom and black treacle.

homemade-cardamom-and-treacle-ice-cream-scoop

Hands down the cardamom and black treacle is my favourite.

The treacle and spice mix together to provide a luscious gingerbread flavour, which is so moreish that I think I might have to make a tub of this every week for the rest of my life.

So to the recipe:

The base of this no churn ice cream is just 3 simple ingredients: double cream, condensed sweetened milk and vanilla extract. The key thing when making no churn ice cream is not to over whip. I experimented a few times and had a couple of fails where the cream and milk split. After trial and error I decided this was most certainly due to mixing the cream and milk at the same time and over whisking. So it works best if you whip the cream first and then fold in the milk. Its also important to keep an eye on the whipping process and stop as soon as the mixture is thick enough (smooth peaks start to form, but not as thick as clotted cream).

Once the cream and milk is combined and whipped up, extra ingredients can be mixed and folded in to create the different flavours. So its really easy to create any kind of ice cream you want or use whatever you can find in your cupboard/spice rack and go for something new and exciting. In general the mix will take a little extra liquid without losing its consistency (E.g. 5 tablespoon of rum or 2 dessert spoons of treacle mix well into the recipes below). However, more solid ingredients such as raisins, cocoa powder, chocolate chips, fudge pieces, spices or anything else you can think of will help to keep a nice consistency as the mix freezes.

Once you have your ice cream in the freezer, get hold of a few friends and some decent waffle cones and get stuck in.

homemade-ice-cream-3-ways-in-glass-in-hand

I used metal loaf tins, double wrapped with cling film to freeze my ice cream in. However, any freezer proof container will do, just be sure to cling well or use a secure lid.

Hope you get chance to whip up some yourself. I'd love to see and hear about your own ideas for new flavours! Comment below or tag with #properfoodieblog on twitter, facebook or instagram.

📖 Recipe

homemade-no-churn-ice-cream-3-ways
Print

Homemade, no churn ice cream: 3 Ways

3 Creamy, delicious homemade ice creams: Vanilla, Rum & Raisin, and Cardamom and Black Treacle.
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 4 hours
Total Time 4 hours 20 minutes
Calories 210kcal

Ingredients

For the ice cream base:

  • 450 ml double cream
  • 150 ml half a can of condensed sweetened milk
  • 2 teaspoon vanilla extract.

For vanilla add:

  • Seeds of 1 vanilla pod or 1 teaspoon of vanilla bean paste

For Rum and Raisin add:

  • 125 g of raisins
  • 5 tablespoon dark rum
  • 1 teaspoon cinnamon powder

For the Cardamom and Black Treacle add:

  • 5 cardamom pods shelled and seeds crushed
  • 2 dessert spoons of black treacle plus extra to drizzle on top if desired

Instructions

For the ice cream base:

  • Place the cream and vanilla extract into the bowl of a mixing machine and use the whisk tool to thicken. Whisk on high for around 3-5 minutes (longer if whisking by hand). Keep a close eye on the whisking process and do not over whip. As soon as the cream starts to thicken, reduce the speed and stop as soon as soft peaks begin to form.
  • Next add the condensed milk and use a spatula to fold in gently (at this point the mixture should be thick but just about pour-able).

For Vanilla ice cream:

  • Remove the vanilla seeds from the pod: slice the pod in half down its length and then use the back of a knife to scrape down the inside of the pod and release the seeds. Add the seeds (or vanilla bean paste) at the start along with the vanilla extract, before whipping.

For the Rum and Raisin ice cream:

  • Place the raisins in a bowl and pour over the rum. Cover with cling film and place in the fridge to soak for at least 30 minutes. Once the cream has been whipped and combined with the milk; add the cinnamon and soaked raisins (pour in all the rum) then fold in gently.

For the Cardamom and Black Treacle ice cream:

  • Crush the cardamom pods by placing the flat of a knife over them and pushing down with your hand. This should split the pod and release the seeds inside. Discard the outer pod and gather together the seeds. Crush the seeds into course powder using a knife or pestle and mortar. Once the cream and milk have been combined add the powdered cardamom seeds and 2 dessert spoons of treacle. Fold in gently. You may wish to add the treacle gradually to prevent it from clumping in one place.

Freezing:

  • Once the ice cream is made transfer into a freezable container (I used metal loaf tins) and seal with a lid or double wrap with cling film. Freeze for at least 4 hours before scooping.

Nutrition

Serving: 8g | Calories: 210kcal | Fat: 21.4g

Per serving of Vanilla Ice Cream (2 scoops)

vanilla ice cream label

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Creamy, homemade,no churn ice cream

Creamy, homemade vanilla ice cream, no churn and simple to make

Homemade rum and raisin ice cream

Homemade cardamom and black treacle ice cream

The post No churn ice cream: 3 Ways appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/no-churn-ice-cream-3-ways/feed/ 0